Hp Laserjet Pro Cm1415Fn Color Multifunction Printer Reference Guide CM1410 MFP Series Software Technical ENWW

HP Laserjet Pro CM1410 c02577815

2015-01-05

: Hp Hp-Laserjet-Pro-Cm1415Fn-Color-Multifunction-Printer-Reference-Guide-140231 hp-laserjet-pro-cm1415fn-color-multifunction-printer-reference-guide-140231 hp pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 282

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

LASERJET PRO CM1410
COLOR MFP SERIES

Software Technical Reference

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP
Series
Software Technical Reference

Trademark Credits

Adobe®, Acrobat® and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

Corel® is a trademark or registered
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.

The information contained herein is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products and
services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 1,9/2010

Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows 7®,
Windows Vista ® and Windows XP® are
U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR®
mark are registered U.S. marks.

Table of contents

1 Document and product basics ........................................................................................... 1
Purpose and scope ................................................................................................................... 2
Documentation availability and localization ................................................................................ 3
User documentation ................................................................................................... 4
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series User Guide .................................. 4
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Install Notes ................................. 5
Help and Learn Center ................................................................................ 5
Administrator documentation ...................................................................................... 5
HP Driver Configuration Utility User Guide .................................................... 6
HP Jetdirect Guide ...................................................................................... 6
Software availability and localization ......................................................................................... 7
Printing-system software on the Web ........................................................................... 7
In-box printing-system software CD ............................................................... 7
HP LaserJet Windows software CD ................................................ 7
CD versions and language support ................................................ 9
2 Windows software description ....................................................................................... 15
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 15
Windows printing-system software ........................................................................................... 16
Windows printing-system software ............................................................................ 16
HP Color LaserJet print drivers .................................................................................. 18
HP PCL 6 Print Driver, PCL 5 Universal Print Driver, and PS Universal Print
Driver ..................................................................................................... 18
Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems .......................... 18
Driver configuration for Windows ............................................................................................ 20
Driver autoconfiguration .......................................................................................... 20
Bidirectional communication ..................................................................................... 20
Enterprise AutoConfiguration .................................................................................... 20
Update Now .......................................................................................................... 22
HP Driver Configuration ........................................................................................... 23
Lockable features ..................................................................................... 25
Continuous export .................................................................................... 25
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool .................................................................................... 26
HP Customer Participation Program .......................................................................................... 27

ENWW

iii

Scan software ........................................................................................................................ 28
Scan methods ......................................................................................................... 28
HP Scan software .................................................................................................... 29
E-mail ..................................................................................................... 32
Scan settings ........................................................................................... 32
Scan drivers ........................................................................................................... 33
WIA driver .............................................................................................. 34
HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility .................................................................................................... 35
HP LaserJet Send Fax software ................................................................................................. 36
Fax to multiple recipients .......................................................................................... 37
Create a cover page ............................................................................................... 37
Fax pages scanned from the product document feeder ................................................. 37
Fax without first printing and scanning the document ................................................... 37
Font support .......................................................................................................................... 38
Basic fonts .............................................................................................................. 38
Default fonts ........................................................................................................... 38
HP Driver Deployment Utility .................................................................................................... 44
3 Install Windows printing-system components ................................................................. 53
Install overview ...................................................................................................................... 54
Software installation types for Windows ................................................................................... 54
Installation options ................................................................................................................. 54
General Windows installation instructions ................................................................................. 55
General Windows installation for direct connections ................................................... 55
Windows installation instructions for direct-connected (USB) products ............. 55
Printer-driver only installation instructions (Microsoft Add Printer Wizard) ........ 55
General Windows installation for network connections ................................................ 57
Network setup ......................................................................................... 57
Windows installation instructions for network-connected products ................... 57
Printer-driver only installation instructions (Microsoft Add Printer Wizard) ........ 58
Printer sharing disclaimer ......................................................................................... 59
Point-and-Print installation for Windows ..................................................................... 59
Modify a pre-existing installation ............................................................................... 60
4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows ............................... 61
Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 61
Access print drivers ................................................................................................................ 62
Printing Preferences driver tabs ................................................................................. 62
Properties driver tabs ............................................................................................... 63
Help system ........................................................................................................................... 64
“What's this?” Help ................................................................................................. 64
Incompatible Print Settings messages ......................................................................... 64
Advanced tab features ............................................................................................................ 66

ENWW

Paper/Output ......................................................................................................... 66
Copy Count ............................................................................................. 67
Graphic ................................................................................................................. 67
Image Color Management ........................................................................ 67
True Type Font .........................................................................................
Document Options ..................................................................................................
Advanced Printing Features .......................................................................
Print Optimizations ...................................................................................
Printer Features ........................................................................................
Layout Options ........................................................................................

67
68
68
68
68
69

Paper/Quality tab features ...................................................................................................... 70
Paper Options ........................................................................................................ 70
Paper sizes .............................................................................................. 71
Custom Paper Size ................................................................................... 71
Name ...................................................................................... 71
Paper size ................................................................................ 72
Units ........................................................................................ 72
Custom width and height control limits ......................................... 72
Paper source ........................................................................................... 72
Paper type .............................................................................................. 73
Special pages .......................................................................................... 74
Covers ..................................................................................... 75
Print pages on different paper ..................................................... 75
Insert blank or preprinted pages .................................................. 75
Chapter separator pages ........................................................... 76
Document preview image ......................................................................................... 76
Print Quality ........................................................................................................... 76
Print Quality drop-down menu ................................................................... 77
Effects tab features ................................................................................................................. 78
Resizing Options ..................................................................................................... 79
Actual Size .............................................................................................. 79
Print Document On ................................................................................... 79
Scale to Fit .............................................................................................. 79
% of Actual Size ...................................................................................... 79
Document preview image ......................................................................................... 80
Watermarks ........................................................................................................... 80
Current watermarks .................................................................................. 81
Watermark Message ................................................................................ 82
Message Angle ........................................................................................ 82
Font Attributes .......................................................................................... 82
Default watermark settings ......................................................................... 83
Finishing tab features .............................................................................................................. 85
Document Options .................................................................................................. 85
Print on Both Sides ................................................................................... 86
ENWW

Print on both sides manually .......................................................
Flip Pages Up ..........................................................................................
Booklet Layout .........................................................................................
Book and Booklet Printing ..........................................................

86
88
89
89

Pages per Sheet ....................................................................................... 90
Print Page Borders .................................................................................... 90
Page Order ............................................................................................. 90
Document preview image ......................................................................................... 90
Orientation ............................................................................................................. 91
Color tab features .................................................................................................................. 92
Color Options ......................................................................................................... 93
Automatic ................................................................................................ 93
Manual ................................................................................................... 93
Neutral Grays .......................................................................................... 94
Color Themes ......................................................................................................... 94
Default (sRGB) ......................................................................................... 94
Photo (sRGB) ........................................................................................... 94
Photo (Adobe RGB 1998) ......................................................................... 94
Vivid (sRGB) ............................................................................................ 95
None ...................................................................................................... 95
Document preview image ......................................................................................... 95
Services tab features ............................................................................................................... 96
Internet Services ...................................................................................................... 97
Device services ....................................................................................................... 97
Device Settings tab features ..................................................................................................... 98
Form to Tray Assignment .......................................................................................... 98
Font Substitution Table ............................................................................................. 99
External Fonts .......................................................................................... 99
Installing external fonts ............................................................. 100
Removing external fonts ........................................................... 100
Installable Options ................................................................................................ 100
Automatic Configuration ......................................................................... 101
Allow Manual Duplexing ......................................................................... 101
Job Separator ........................................................................................ 101
Printing Shortcuts tab features ................................................................................................ 102
Use defined printing shortcuts ................................................................................. 103
General Everyday Printing ....................................................................... 103
Paper source .......................................................................... 103
Paper sizes ............................................................................. 104
Paper type .............................................................................. 104
Print on both sides ................................................................... 106
Eco-print (Two-sided Printing) ................................................................... 106
Factory Defaults ..................................................................................... 106
Envelopes .............................................................................................. 106
vi

ENWW

Cardstock Heavy ...................................................................................
Glossy/Presentation ...............................................................................
Snapshot Photos ....................................................................................................
Labels ..................................................................................................................

106
107
107
107

Labels .................................................................................................................. 107
Create a custom printing shortcut ............................................................................ 107
About tab features ................................................................................................................ 109
5 Macintosh software and utilities ................................................................................... 111
Supported operating systems for Macintosh .............................................................................
Macintosh system requirements ..............................................................................................
Hardware requirements .........................................................................................
Macintosh printing-system software ........................................................................................
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PPD .......................................................
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PDE .......................................................

112
112
112
112
112
113

HP USB EWS Gateway .......................................................................................... 113
HP LaserJet Utility .................................................................................................. 113
Supported printer drivers for Macintosh ................................................................... 113
Priority for print settings for Macintosh ..................................................................... 113
Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh ............................................................. 114
Software for Macintosh computers ........................................................................... 114
HP LaserJet Utility ................................................................................... 114
Open the HP LaserJet Utility ...................................................... 114
Embedded Web Server ........................................................................... 114
Availability ........................................................................................................... 114
Printing-system software on the Web ......................................................... 115
In-box printing-system software CD ........................................................... 115
Macintosh disk ........................................................................
Macintosh install and uninstall instructions ...............................................................................
Install the Macintosh printing-system software ...........................................................
General installation for Macintosh operating systems ..................................
Setup instructions ...................................................................................
Setting up a printer with Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6 ..................

115
116
116
116
116
117

Troubleshooting the product setup ............................................. 117
Remove the printing-system software from Macintosh operating systems ....................... 118
6 Solve problems ............................................................................................................. 119
Problem-solving checklist .......................................................................................................
Step 1: Check that the product power is on ..............................................................
Step 2: Check the environment where the product is installed .....................................
Step 3: Check the control panel for error messages ...................................................
Step 4: Test print functionality .................................................................................
Step 5: Test copy functionality ................................................................................

ENWW

120
120
120
120
121
121

vii

Step
Step
Step
Step

6:
7:
8:
9:

Test the fax sending functionality .................................................................. 121
Test the fax receiving functionality ................................................................ 121
Try sending a print job from a computer ....................................................... 121
Test the walk-up USB printing functionality ..................................................... 122

Troubleshooting process ........................................................................................................ 122
Power subsystem ................................................................................................... 122
Power-on checks .................................................................................... 122
Tools for troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 123
Component diagnostics .......................................................................................... 123
LED diagnostics ...................................................................................... 123
Network LEDs ......................................................................... 123
Control panel LEDs .................................................................. 123
Control-panel diagnostics ........................................................................ 124
Engine Diagnostics ................................................................................. 124
Engine test .............................................................................. 124
Use the HP ToolboxFX software ............................................................................... 125
View the HP ToolboxFX ........................................................................... 125
Status ................................................................................................... 125
Fax ....................................................................................................... 126
Fax Receive ............................................................................ 126
Fax phone book ...................................................................... 126
Fax send log ........................................................................... 128
Fax receive log ....................................................................... 128
Block Faxes ............................................................................ 128
Help ..................................................................................................... 128
System Settings ...................................................................................... 129
Device Information .................................................................. 129
Paper Setup ............................................................................ 130
Print Quality ........................................................................... 130
Print Density ........................................................................... 130
Paper Types ............................................................................ 130
System setup ........................................................................... 131
Device polling ......................................................................... 131
Print Settings .......................................................................................... 131
Printing .................................................................................. 131
PCL5 ..................................................................................... 131
PostScript ............................................................................... 131
Network Settings .................................................................................... 131
Internal print-quality test pages ................................................................................ 132
Configuration page ................................................................................ 132
Print-quality troubleshooting tools ............................................................................ 133
Calibrate the product to align the colors .................................................... 133
Control panel menus .............................................................................................. 133
Setup Menu ........................................................................................... 133
viii

ENWW

Reports menu .......................................................................... 134
Quick Forms menu .................................................................. 135
Fax Setup menu ...................................................................... 136
System Setup menu .................................................................. 139
Service menu .......................................................................... 142
Network Setup menu ............................................................... 144
Function specific menus ........................................................................... 145
Copy Menu ............................................................................ 145
Fax Menu ............................................................................... 146
Scan Menu ............................................................................. 149
USB Flash Drive ...................................................................... 150
Interpret control-panel messages ............................................................................. 151
Control panel message types ................................................................... 151
Control panel messages .......................................................................... 151
10.100X Supply Memory Error ................................................. 151
49 Error, Turn off then on ......................................................... 151
50.x Fuser Error ...................................................................... 151
79 Error Turn off then on .......................................................... 153
Black Cartridge Low ................................................................ 153
Black in wrong position ............................................................ 153
Black Very Low ....................................................................... 153
Canceled scan. Clear document ................................................ 155
Communication error. .............................................................. 155
Cyan Cartridge Low ................................................................ 155
Cyan in wrong position ............................................................ 155
Cyan Very Low ....................................................................... 156
Device error, press OK ............................................................ 156
Device is busy. Try again later .................................................. 156
Document feeder jam. Clear and reload. ................................... 156
Document feeder mispick. Reload .............................................. 157
Door open .............................................................................. 157
Engine Communication Error .................................................... 157
Engine error. Press OK to continue. ........................................... 157
Fax is busy. Canceled send. ..................................................... 157
Fax is busy. Redial pending. ..................................................... 158
Fax receive error. .................................................................... 158
Fax Send error. ....................................................................... 159
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax receive. ............................. 159
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax send. ................................. 159
Fit to Page on flatbed only ........................................................ 159
Install [color] cartridge .............................................................
Invalid driver Press OK ............................................................
Invalid entry ...........................................................................
Jam in (area), Open door and clear jam ....................................
ENWW

160
160
160
160
ix

Jam in Tray 1, Clear jam and then press OK .............................. 160
Load paper ............................................................................ 161
Load Tray 1 , Press OK to use available media ..... 161
Load Tray 1, / Cleaning mode, OK to start ....... 161
Magenta Cartridge Low ........................................................... 161
Magenta in wrong position ...................................................... 161
Magenta Very Low .................................................................. 161
Manual Duplex Load Tray 1, Press OK ...................................... 162
Manual feed , Press OK to use available media .... 162
Memory is low. Try again later ................................................. 162
Memory is low. Press OK. ........................................................ 162
Memory low Only 1 copy made. Press OK to continue. ............... 163
Misprint, Press OK ................................................................... 163
No dial tone. .......................................................................... 163
No fax answer. Canceled send. ................................................ 164
No fax answer. Redial pending. ............................................... 164
No fax detected. ..................................................................... 164
Print failure, press OK. If error repeats, turn off then on. ............... 165
Replace [color] ....................................................................... 165
Scanner error #, Turn off then on .............................................. 165
Scanner reserved for PC scan ................................................... 166
Scanning error Cannot connect ................................................. 166
Settings cleared ...................................................................... 166
Used [color] installed, to accept press OK .................................. 166
Yellow Cartridge Low .............................................................. 166
Yellow in wrong position .......................................................... 167
Yellow Very Low ..................................................................... 167
Event-log messages ............................................................................................... 168
Menu map .......................................................................................................................... 170
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed ............................................................................ 171
The product does not pick up paper ........................................................................ 171
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper ........................................................... 171
Prevent paper jams ................................................................................................ 171
Clear jams ........................................................................................................... 172
Jam locations ......................................................................................... 172
Clear jams from the document feeder ....................................................... 173
Clear jams from the input tray .................................................................. 175
Clear jams from the output bin ................................................................. 178
Improve print quality ............................................................................................................. 179
Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver ............................................... 179
Change the paper type setting for Windows .............................................. 179
Change the paper type setting for Mac ..................................................... 179
Adjust color settings in the printer driver ................................................................... 180
Change the color theme for a print job ..................................................... 180
x

ENWW

Change the color options ........................................................................ 180
Use paper that meets HP specifications .................................................................... 182
Print a cleaning page ............................................................................................ 182
Calibrate the product to align the colors .................................................................. 183
Check the print cartridges ...................................................................................... 183
Print the Supplies Status page .................................................................. 184
Interpret the Print Quality Page ................................................................. 185
Inspect the print cartridge for damage ...................................................... 186
Repetitive image defects .......................................................................... 187
Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs ........................................... 188
Improve print quality for copies ............................................................................... 189
Clean the product ................................................................................................................ 190
Clean the exterior ................................................................................................. 190
Clean the paper path ............................................................................................ 190
Clean the paper path from the product control panel .................................. 190
Clean the scanner glass strip and platen .................................................................. 190
Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad .................................... 191
Clean the touch screen .......................................................................................... 192
The product does not print or it prints slowly ............................................................................ 193
The product does not print ...................................................................................... 193
The product prints slowly ........................................................................................ 194
Solve walk-up USB printing problems ...................................................................................... 195
The USB Flash Drive menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory ............... 195
The file does not print from the USB storage accessory ............................................... 195
The file that you want to print is not listed in the USB Flash Drive menu ........................ 195
Solve connectivity problems ................................................................................................... 196
Solve direct-connect problems ................................................................................. 196
Solve network problems ......................................................................................... 196
Poor physical connection ......................................................................... 196
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ...................... 196
The computer is unable to communicate with the product ............................ 197
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network .......... 197
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ................ 197
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly .............................. 197
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................... 197
Solve wireless network problems ............................................................................................ 198
Wireless connectivity checklist ................................................................................ 198
The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product has been
turned off ............................................................................................................. 199
The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes ........................... 199
The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed ........... 199
The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or product ........ 199
Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product ............................................. 200
The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN .......................... 200

ENWW

The network does not appear in the wireless networks list .......................................... 200
The wireless network is not functioning ..................................................................... 201
Service mode functions ......................................................................................................... 202
Secondary service menu ........................................................................................ 202
Open the secondary service menu ............................................................ 202
Secondary service menu structure ............................................................. 202
Product resets ....................................................................................................... 203
Restore the factory-set defaults ................................................................. 203
NVRAM initialization .............................................................................. 204
Solve fax problems ............................................................................................................... 204
Fax troubleshooting checklist .................................................................................. 204
Troubleshoot fax codes and trace reports ................................................................. 206
View and interpret fax error codes ........................................................... 206
Fax trace report ..................................................................................... 217
Fax logs and reports .............................................................................................. 217
Print all fax reports ................................................................................. 217
Print individual fax reports .......................................................................
Set the fax error report ............................................................................
Change error correction and fax speed ...................................................................
Set the fax-error-correction mode ..............................................................
Change the fax speed ............................................................................
Solve problems sending faxes .................................................................................

219
219
219
219
220
220

An error message displays on the control panel .........................................
The Communication error. message appears ..............................
No dial tone. ..........................................................................
The Fax is busy. message appears ............................................
The No fax answer. message appears .......................................
Document feeder paper jam .....................................................

220
220
221
221
222
222

The Fax storage is full. message appears ................................... 223
Scanner error ......................................................................... 223
The control panel displays a Ready message with no attempt to send the fax . 223
The control panel displays the message "Storing page 1" and does not
progress beyond that message ................................................................. 224
Faxes can be received, but not sent .......................................................... 224
Unable to use fax functions from the control panel ...................................... 224
Unable to use speed dials ....................................................................... 225
Unable to use group dials ....................................................................... 225
Receive a recorded error message from the phone company when trying to
send a fax .............................................................................................
Unable to send a fax when a phone is connected to the product ..................
Solve problems receiving faxes ...............................................................................
The fax does not respond ........................................................................
The fax has a dedicated phone line ...........................................
An answering machine is connected to the product .....................

xii

225
226
227
227
227
227

ENWW

A telephone handset is connected to the product ......................... 228
The Answer Mode setting is set to the Manual setting ................... 228
Voice mail is available on the fax line ........................................ 228
The product is connected to a DSL phone service ........................ 229
The product uses a fax over IP or VoIP phone service ................... 229
An error message displays on the control panel ......................................... 229
The No fax detected. message appears ..................................... 229
The Communication error. message appears .............................. 230
The Fax storage is full. message appears ................................... 231
The Fax is busy. message appears ............................................ 231
A fax is received but does not print .......................................................... 231
The Private Receive feature is on ............................................... 231
Sender receives a busy signal .................................................................. 232
A handset is connected to the product ........................................ 232
A phone line splitter is being used ............................................. 232
No dial tone .......................................................................................... 232
Cannot send or receive a fax on a PBX line ............................................... 232
Solve general fax problems .................................................................................... 233
Faxes are sending slowly ........................................................................ 233
Fax quality is poor ................................................................................. 234
Fax cuts off or prints on two pages ........................................................... 234
Product updates ................................................................................................................... 235
7 Engineering Details ....................................................................................................... 237
Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 237
Printing print-ready documents ............................................................................................... 238
Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser ............................................. 238
Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network connection ............................ 239
Windows operating systems .................................................................... 239
Macintosh operating systems ................................................................... 240
Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port ................................................... 240
Windows 2000 Service Pack 3, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista ................................................ 241
Print-ready file printing in a Windows network .......................................................... 241
Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems ................................................................... 241
Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command .................................................... 241
Paper and print media .......................................................................................................... 243
Media sources and destinations .............................................................................. 243
Source commands ................................................................................................. 243
Media types ......................................................................................................... 244
Media-type commands ............................................................................ 244
Parameter settings (fax data-store parameters) ......................................................................... 244
Installation notes .................................................................................................................. 245
I. INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................ 245
ENWW

xiii

PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT .............................................................. 245
SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS ......................................................... 245
OVERVIEW OF THE PRINTING-SYSTEM COMPONENTS ........................... 246
Drivers ................................................................................... 246
Software Applications .............................................................. 246
HP ToolboxFX ......................................................................... 247
HP Help and Learn Center ........................................................ 247
Uninstaller .............................................................................. 247
II. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .......................................................................... 247
INSTALLING SOFTWARE ........................................................................ 247
INSTALLING SOFTWARE ........................................................................ 247
Printing-system installation from the CD or Internet download for
network and USB connections ................................................... 248
Port selection .......................................................................... 248
Printer driver only (Add Printer) - Windows XP, Windows Server
2003, and Windows Server 2008 ............................................ 248
Printer driver only (Add Printer) - Windows Vista and Windows 7 . 249
UNINSTALLER ........................................................................................ 250
III. LATE-BREAKING INFORMATION ....................................................................... 250
KNOWN ISSUES AND WORKAROUNDS ................................................ 250
General ................................................................................. 250
Upgrading Windows ............................................................... 250
IV. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE ................................................................................ 251
CUSTOMER SUPPORT ............................................................................ 251
WEB .................................................................................................... 251
HP SOFTWARE AND SUPPORT SERVICES - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ... 251
V. LEGAL STATEMENTS ......................................................................................... 251
TRADEMARK NOTICES ........................................................................... 251
SOFTWARE WARRANTY, LICENSE, AND COPYRIGHT .............................. 251
Warranty ............................................................................... 251
License ................................................................................... 251
Copyright ............................................................................... 251
Index ............................................................................................................................... 253

xiv

ENWW

List of tables

Table 1-1 Documentation availability ...................................................................................................... 3
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table

1-2 Software CD supported languages ........................................................................................... 9
1-3 Supported printer driver languages ......................................................................................... 11
1-4 Installer component languages ............................................................................................... 12
1-5 Documentation languages ..................................................................................................... 13
2-1 Software components for Windows ........................................................................................ 16

Table 2-2 Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication1 ..................... 20
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share ..................................................... 21
Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments ..................................................................... 22
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration ........................................................ 25
Table 2-6 Examples of supported e-mail programs .................................................................................. 32
Table 2-7 Available scan settings .......................................................................................................... 33
Table 2-8 Default fonts ........................................................................................................................ 38
Table 2-9 Additional PS emulation fonts ................................................................................................. 41
Table 4-1 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks ........................................................... 83
Table 4-2 Page orientation ................................................................................................................... 88
Table 6-1 Event-log messages ............................................................................................................. 168
Table 6-2 Repetitive image defects ...................................................................................................... 187
Table 6-3 Secondary service menu ...................................................................................................... 202
Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes ....................................................................................................... 206
Table 6-5 Fax send error codes .......................................................................................................... 210
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series MFP Series media sources and destinations ............. 243
Table 7-2 Media-source commands ..................................................................................................... 243
Table 7-3 Media-type commands ........................................................................................................ 244

ENWW

xvi

ENWW

List of figures

Figure 1-1 Installation software CD – User Documentation screen ................................................................ 4
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

1-2 Installation software CD – Administrator Documentation screen ................................................... 6
2-1 Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen .................................................... 27
2-2 HP Scan dialog box ........................................................................................................... 30
2-3 Scan Setup Options dialog box ........................................................................................ 31
2-4 WIA-driver user interface — flatbed ....................................................................................... 34
2-5 HP LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – user interface .............................................................. 36

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

2-6 Package Source .............................................................................................................. 46
2-7 Network Settings ........................................................................................................... 47
2-8 HP DDU Driver Configuration settings .................................................................................... 49
3-1 Installer screen — Welcome Back! ..................................................................................... 60
4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message ......................................................................... 65
4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab ....................................................................... 66

Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure
Figure

4-3 Paper/Quality tab .......................................................................................................... 70
4-4 Effects tab ......................................................................................................................... 78
4-5 Finishing tab .................................................................................................................... 85
4-6 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box .............................................................................. 88
4-7 Color tab .......................................................................................................................... 92
4-8 Services tab ...................................................................................................................... 96

Figure 4-9 Device Settings tab .......................................................................................................... 98
Figure 4-10 Printing Shortcuts tab ................................................................................................. 102
Figure 4-11 About tab ..................................................................................................................... 109

ENWW

xvii

xviii

ENWW

Document and product basics

●

Purpose and scope

●

Documentation availability and localization

●

Software availability and localization

Purpose and scope
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the
printing-system software for the product.
This STR is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center
(CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS)
personnel, and end users, as appropriate.
NOTE: This STR describes drivers that are available from the product firmware and shipped on the
printing-system software CD that comes with the product. This STR does not describe drivers that will
become available on the Web.
The following information is included in this STR:
●

Descriptions of drivers, operating systems, and system environments

●

Descriptions of installing and uninstalling the printing-system software components

For information about the location of information within chapters, see the table of contents. An index is
also provided in this STR.
Additional detailed information about the printing-system software is published in an addendum to this
STR. The following information is available in the addendum:

●

Lists of installed files

●

System-modification information, such as files added or modified

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

Documentation availability and localization
NOTE: For information about language support for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series
product, see CD versions and language support on page 9.
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series printing-system
documentation by operating system.
Table 1-1 Documentation availability
Document

Windows XP/Server
2003/Server 2008/
Vista/7

Macintosh

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series User Guide (.PDF file)

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Install Notes

Access to HP LaserJet documents depends on the type of document and its location:
●

Some documents can be opened from the Installer.

●

Some documents are available on the Web through links in the Installer.

Documents are available in the following file formats:
●

Portable Document Format (.PDF). The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series printingsystem software CD includes Adobe® Acrobat® Reader for viewing online documentation.

●

Compiled HTML (.CHM). When you click a documentation link to a .CHM document, a
Microsoft HTML Viewer opens the file on the computer screen.

●

Hypertext Markup (.HTM). When you click a documentation link to an .HTM document, a
Web browser opens the file on the computer screen.

●

Rich Text Format (.RTF). This is a text file. You can navigate to files and open them in
Microsoft Word or Microsoft WordPad.

Documentation for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series is divided into the following
categories:

ENWW

●

User documentation

●

Administrator documentation

Documentation availability and localization

User documentation
The following figure shows the Documentation screen, which appears when you click More
Options then Documentation on the main screen of the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series
printing-system software CD.
Figure 1-1 Installation software CD – User Documentation screen

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series User Guide
The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series User Guide describes the basic product features.
This guide may be accessed locally from the CD included with your product. The latest version of this
guide may be accessed from the internet.
To access the local version from the CD:
1.

In the main screen of the Installer, click the More Options then click theDocumentation
button.

Click the User Guide (CD) button. The Help and Learn Center opens.

Click on Browse User Guide.

To access the latest version from the internet:
1.

In the main screen of the Installer, click the More Options button, then click the
Documentation button.

Navigate to the Manuals\ folder.
Click the User Guide (Web) button. The guide opens. This accesses the most up to date version.

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Install Notes
The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Install Notes (in .HTM format) contain important
information about product features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical
assistance.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.

In the main screen of the Installer, click the More Options then click the Documentation
button.

Click the Readme button. The guide opens.

You can also gain access to the file by following these steps:
1.

Insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

Navigate to the CD:\Setup\Docs\Readme\ folder.

Open the file that has the appropriate file name:
LJCM1410_install-notes_XXWW.HTM

NOTE: The "XXWW" in the file name corresponds to the language. For instance, the file name for
the French version of the document is LJCM1410_install-notes_FRWW.HTM.

Help and Learn Center
Click Help and Learn Center on the Documentation screen of the Installer to connect to a Web
page that provides step-by-step instructions for performing specific tasks, including clearing jams and
loading trays.

Administrator documentation
The following figure shows the Administrator Documentation screen.
To navigate to this screen, click the More Options button on the main screen of the Installer, and then
click the Admin Documentation button.
NOTE: These links are to non-product specific documentation that may be useful and is available only
online. Internet access is required.

ENWW

Documentation availability and localization

Figure 1-2 Installation software CD – Administrator Documentation screen

HP Driver Configuration Utility User Guide
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:
1.

In the main screen of the Installer, click More Options, and then click Admin
Documentation.

Click HP Driver Configuration User Utility Guide.

HP Jetdirect Guide
The HP Jetdirect Guide is a network administrator's guide (in .PDF format) that contains information
about connecting the product directly to a network.
To view this guide from the software CD, follow these steps:

In the main screen of the Installer, click More Options, and then click Admin
Documentation.

Click HP Jetdirect Guide.

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

Software availability and localization
This section provides information about the availability of the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP
Series printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is
available from HP fulfillment centers. For more information, go to the following Web site:

Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CD is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers an
option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE: This STR describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD. This STR
does not describe any drivers that might be released for use by support personnel.
To view the product support web site from the CD, follow these steps:
1.

In the main screen of the Installer, click More Options, and then click Web Support.

Click Product Support.

In-box printing-system software CD
The software CD for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product contains a variety of files
for installing the printing-system software on the computer. This section describes the files that are
available on the software CD and provides additional information about support and availability.
The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series comes with two printing-system software CDs, one for
Windows operating systems and one for Macintosh operating systems.
The files on each CD include documentation files and files that are required in order to install and
uninstall the printing-system components.
HP LaserJet Windows software CD
NOTE: For information about the contents of the Macintosh CD, see Macintosh software and utilities
on page 111.
The root directory of the Windows software CD contains the AUTORUN.EXE file, the SETUP.EXE file,
and the following directories:

ENWW

●

Installer

●

Languages

●

Prerequisites

●

Setup

●

Utilities

Software availability and localization

The Utilities folder contains the files to run these stand-alone utilities:

●

FileToEmail

●

Scrubber

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

CD versions and language support
The product printing-system software CD is available with the following components and languages.
Table 1-2 Software CD supported languages

ENWW

Language

Two-letter abbreviation

HP-preferred name

File designation

Arabic

ARWW

Bahasa Indonesian

IDWW

Bulgarian

BGWW

Catalan

CAWW

Croatian

Hrvatski

HRWW

Czech

Cestina

CSWW

Danish

Dansk

DAWW

Dutch

Nederlands

NLWW

English

ENWW

Estonian

Eesti

ETWW

Finnish

Suomi

FIWW

French

Francais

FRWW

German

Deutsch

DEWW

Greek

ELWW

Hebrew

HEWW

Hungarian

Magyar

HUWW

Italian

Italiano

ITWW

Japanese

JAWW

Kazakh

KKWW

Korean

KOWW

Latvian

Latviski

LVWW

Lithuanian

Lietuviskai

LTWW

Norwegian

Norsk

NOWW

Polish

Polski

PLWW

Portuguese

Portugues

PTWW

Romanian

ROWW

Russian

RUWW

Serbian

Srpski

SRWW

Simplified Chinese

ZHCN

Simplified Chinese

ZHCN

Software availability and localization

Table 1-2 Software CD supported languages (continued)

Language

Two-letter abbreviation

HP-preferred name

File designation

Slovak

SKWW

Slovenian

SLWW

Spanish

Espanol

ESWW

Swedish

Svenska

SVWW

Thai

THWW

Traditional Chinese

ZHTW

Traditional Chinese

ZHTW

Turkish

Turkce

TUWW

Ukrainian

UKWW

Vietnamese

VIWW

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

Driver languages
The product provides driver support in the following languages.
Table 1-3 Supported printer driver languages

ENWW

Component

Language list

HP PCL 6 Print Driver

●

Arabic

●

Latvian

HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver

●

Bahasa Indonesian

●

Lithuanian

HP PS Universal Print Driver

●

Bulgarian

●

Norwegian

●

Catalan

●

Polish

●

Croatian

●

Portuguese

●

Czech

●

Romanian

●

Danish

●

Russian

●

Dutch

●

Serbian

●

English

●

Simplified Chinese

●

Estonian

●

Slovak

●

Finnish

●

Slovenian

●

French

●

Spanish

●

German

●

Swedish

●

Greek

●

Thai

●

Hebrew

●

Traditional Chinese

●

Hungarian

●

Turkish

●

Italian

●

Ukrainian

●

Japanese

●

Vietnamese

●

Kazakh

●

Korean

Software availability and localization

Installer languages
The product provides installer component support in the following languages.
Table 1-4 Installer component languages

Component

Language list

Administrator install

●

Arabic

●

Latvian

Installer

●

Bahasa Indonesian

●

Lithuanian

Common Windows installer

●

Bulgarian

●

Norwegian

Web registration (with the following
exceptions)

●

Catalan

●

Polish

●

Croatian

●

Portuguese

●

Czech

●

Romanian

●

Danish

●

Russian

●

Dutch

●

Serbian

●

English

●

Simplified Chinese

●

Estonian

●

Slovak

●

Finnish

●

Slovenian

●

French

●

Spanish

●

German

●

Swedish

●

Greek

●

Thai

●

Hebrew

●

Traditional Chinese

●

Hungarian

●

Turkish

●

Italian

●

Ukrainian

●

Japanese

●

Vietnamese

●

Kazakh

●

Korean

●

Arabic and Hebrew support in
English only

●

Catalan support in Spanish
only

●

No support for Bulgarian,
Estonian, Croatian, Lithuanian,
Latvian, Romanian, Slovak,
Slovenian, Serbian, Thai,
Ukrainian

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

Documentation languages
The product provides documentation in the following languages.
Table 1-5 Documentation languages
Component
●

●

ENWW

Language list

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series User Guide (.PDF
file)

●

Arabic

●

Norwegian

●

Bahasa Indonesian

●

Polish

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series User Guide (.CHM
file)

●

Bulgarian

●

Portuguese

●

Catalan

●

Romanian

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series Driver
Preconfiguration User Guide
(Available in English only)

●

Croatian

●

Russian

●

Czech

●

Slovak

●

Danish

●

Slovenian

HP JetDirect Administrator's
Guide (.PDF file) (with the
following exceptions)

●

Dutch

●

Serbian

●

English

●

Spanish

●

Finnish

●

Swedish

●

French

●

Thai

●

German

●

Turkish

●

Greek

●

Ukrainian

●

Hebrew

●

Simplified Chinese

●

Hungarian

●

Traditional Chinese

●

Italian

●

Kazakh

●

Korean

◦

Catalan documentation in
Spanish only

◦

No documentation in
Arabic, Bulgarian, Czech,
Greek, Hebrew, Croatian,
Estonian, Lithuanian,
Latvian, Romanian,
Slovak, Slovenian,
Serbian, Turkish,
Ukrainian

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series Install Notes (.HTML
file)

Software availability and localization

Chapter 1 Document and product basics

ENWW

Windows software description

Introduction
The product comes with software and installers for Microsoft Windows and Apple Computer, Inc.,
Macintosh systems. Linux and UNIX systems are supported, and software is available on the Web. For
information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, see the section that corresponds
to that system. For information about Mac software, see Macintosh software and utilities on page 111.
This section contains information about the following topics:

ENWW

●

Windows printing-system software

●

Driver configuration for Windows

●

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool

●

HP Customer Participation Program

●

Scan software

●

HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility

●

HP LaserJet Send Fax software

●

Font support

●

HP Driver Deployment Utility

Introduction

Windows printing-system software
This section contains information about the following topics:
●

Windows printing-system software

●

HP Color LaserJet print drivers

Windows printing-system software
Table 2-1 Software components for Windows

Component

Description

HP installer

Installs the printing-system software based on the hardware it detects from the host computer.

Uninstaller

Removes files and folders that were installed when the printing-system software was originally
installed on the computer.

Scrubber Utility

A standalone utility used remove all the installation files and folders that were installed with the
printing system software was originally installed in the computer.

File-to-email Utility

Collects crash logs and attaches the data files to an e-mail to assist troubleshooting an installation
or operation failure.

HP LaserJet Scan software

Provides access to the scan functions on the product.

HP LaserJet Send Fax
software

Provides the ability to send faxes from the computer.

HP ToolboxFX

Provides an interface to manage the product. Use HP ToolboxFX to perform the following tasks:
●

Monitor the status of the product.

●

Change the print, phone book, and limited fax settings for the product.

●

Find troubleshooting information and instructions for performing basic tasks.

●

Receive Status Alerts when certain events occur or conditions exist on the product.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Table 2-1 Software components for Windows (continued)
Component

Description

Driver software

Use the driver software to print, fax, and scan with the computer and the product.
This software includes the following drivers:

Readiris Professional
v12.0 text-recognition
software by IRIS

●

The HP PCL 6 printer driver. The HP PCL 6 printer driver is installed by default.

●

The HP PCL 5 Universal Printer Driver (UPD). This printer driver is not installed by default. To
install the HP PCL 5 UPD, use the Microsoft Add Printer wizard.

●

The HP postscript level 3 emulation printer driver and PostScript printer description (PPD) file
for printing with PS level 3 emulation. This printer driver is not installed by default. To install
the HP PS printer driver, use the Microsoft Add Printer wizard.

●

The HP LaserJet Send Fax driver

●

Scan drivers
◦

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for Windows XP and Vista. WIA
scanning can be started from a WIA-compliant program or from the computer. WIA has
its own user interface that is relatively simple and does not contain the wide range of
image-quality options that are available in the TWAIN driver user interface.

◦

TWAIN driver. TWAIN is an industry-standard scanning protocol. Scanning from the
product can be initiated from any TWAIN-compliant software program.

Converts scanned images into text that can be edited in word-processing programs.
The user interface is localized into six languages. However, the software supports text-recognition
in 124 languages.
Readiris Professional supports text recognition in 2-byte Asian characters. You must have your
operating system set up to display 2-byte characters in order to see the text.
NOTE: For better text-recognition scanning results, start Readiris and scan directly into the
program. Readiris v12.0 automatically starts a wizard to help guide this process.
When Readiris is installed on the computer, it appears as an option in the destination drop-down
box in the HP Scan software. If you select Readiris as the destination, the image is scanned
into .TIFF format and Readiris automatically starts the text-recognition process.
The Readiris software uses a separate installer that comes on a separate CD. The initial release of
the product includes Readiris Professional software.

Online Help

Provides help for using the product software.
The user documentation for this product is included on the installation CD as both .CHM (online
help) files and Adobe® Acrobat® .PDF files. A Web browser must be installed on the computer to
view the contents from any .CHM file. Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on the computer to
view the contents from any .PDF file.

ENWW

Windows printing-system software

HP Color LaserJet print drivers
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series print drivers provide the printing features and
communication between the computer and the product. The software CD includes software for end
users and network administrators who are working in the following operating environments:
●

Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server
2008 (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64bit)

●

Apple Mac OS X v10.5 and later

In Windows operating systems, automatic configuration, driver updates after a new product
configuration, and preconfiguration features are available with the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP
Series product.
NOTE: For additional information about installing the printing-system software, see the HP LaserJet
Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Install Notes on the printing-system software CD.
All of the drivers provide access to the paper-handling and print-quality features.

HP PCL 6 Print Driver, PCL 5 Universal Print Driver, and PS Universal Print
Driver
All of the Windows drivers are supported by Microsoft 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. The
HP PCL 6 driver is included on the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series printing-system software
CD. The PCL 5 Universal Print Driver and the PS Universal Print Driver are available for download at
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/CM1410series
NOTE: If you select the recommended installation by clicking Install Now on the main screen of
the Installer, the HP PCL 6 Print Driver is installed by default.

Print-driver version numbers for Windows operating systems
Access to print-driver version numbers varies, depending on the operating system in which the HP
LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product is installed.
NOTE: For a list of HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series print drivers, updated HP printingsystem software, and product-support information, go to:
www.hp.com/support/CM1410series
The Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, and Windows 7
operating systems support the HP PCL 6, PCL 5 Universal Print Driver, and PS Emulation Universal Print

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Drivers. If you are using an HP print driver in a Windows environment, follow these steps to find driverversion information:
1.

In Windows Vista and Windows 7, click the Start button, click Control Panel, click
Hardware and Sound, and then click Printers.
In Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008, click Start, click Settings,
and then click Printers and Faxes.

Right-click the product icon.

Click Properties.

Click the About tab.

You can also gain information about driver versions by clicking the About button that appears on most
driver tabs.

ENWW

Windows printing-system software

Driver configuration for Windows
The HP print drivers feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments,
provide automatic discovery and driver configuration for product accessories at the time of installation.
Some accessories that are automatically discovered and configured include the duplexing unit, optional
paper trays, printer hard disk, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs).

Driver autoconfiguration
Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication occurs in the
following circumstances:
●

When a print driver is installed by using the installer

●

When using the Update Now feature for a driver that is already installed

However, as shown in the following table, driver autoconfiguration and Update Now are not available
in Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, or Windows 7
operating systems over a direct connection when the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series
product is installed by using the Add Printer wizard.
Table 2-2 Automatic discovery and driver configuration through bidirectional communication1

Connection type

Add Printer Wizard install

Common installer

Network

Yes

Direct connection

Yes

The table applies to Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, and Windows 7.

Bidirectional communication
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the product
during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
Bidirectional communication is the capability of the product to respond to data inquiries from the
computer and report information back, such as what type of print paper is available or what
accessories are connected to the product. Bidirectional communication depends on the network
operating system and on the type of connection that exists between the computer and the HP LaserJet
Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series. If the connection does not have this capability (that is, if it has no
bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report information back to
the host computer.

Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration
functionality for installation of the print driver over a network, whether you use the installer on the
printing-system software CD or the Add Printer wizard to install the driver. Driver installation that
includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the product.
Configuration occurs without user interaction.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

If bidirectional-communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the
pre-existing bidirectional-communication software is used to configure the print driver.
If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs bidirectionalcommunication software that allows it to communicate with the product and automatically match the
print driver with the actual product configuration. EAC is activated during installation of the driver or
whenever the Update Now feature is used.
If the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product configuration changes after installation, the
driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support
bidirectional communication by using the Update Now feature. For more information, see Update Now
on page 22.
The following tables show the availability of EAC for various operating systems and network
environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 2-3 EAC availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method

Connection type

Microsoft Share1
2000

2000/XP
host with
2000/XP
client/
Windows
Server 2008/
Windows
Vista

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

TCP/IP (HP)

TCP/IP (MS)

IPX/SPX (HP)

TCP/IP

IPX/SPX

TCP/IP (HP)

TCP/IP (MS)

IPX/SPX (HP)

USB
Network

Jetdirect

Standard

Add Printer

Direct connect

Parallel
USB

Network

Jetdirect

Standard

ENWW

This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista host with Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server
2008, or Windows Vista client.

Driver configuration for Windows

Table 2-4 EAC availability in Novell Netware environments
Method

Connection type

Novell
Netware 4.x

Netware 5.x

Bindery queue

NDS queue

Bindery queue

USB
Network

Jetdirect

TCP/IP
IPX/SPX

Standard

TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP (MS1)
IPX/SPX (HP)

Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft Client
Service for NetWare.

Update Now
If you have modified the configuration of the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product since
installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that
support bidirectional communication. Use the Update Now feature to automatically reflect the new
configuration in the driver.
For example, if the product is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, use
the Update Now feature to query the product and update the settings to match the new product
configuration.
The feature automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears
on the Device Settings tab.
NOTE: Depending on which settings were updated, the Update Now feature might change the
configuration information that displays on the print-driver tabs, instead of (or in addition to) changing
the information on the Device Settings tab.
NOTE: The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows XP clients
are connected to Windows XP hosts.
To activate the Update Now feature, follow these steps:
1.

Right-click the product name.

Click Properties.

Click Device Settings.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

If necessary, click Installable Options to expand it and show the options.

In the Automatic Configuration drop-down menu, select Update Now.

Click OK to save the setting.

HP Driver Configuration
HP Driver Configuration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP printing-system
software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using
HP Driver Configuration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise
environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP print drivers before installing the
drivers in the network environment.
HP Driver Configuration is most beneficial when configuring print drivers for multiple workstations or
print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be
configured:
●

device settings

●

printing-preferences settings

The driver is configured to match the product hardware so that access to all of the product accessories
through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays).
Most driver-feature settings can also be configured.
HP Driver Configuration configures the driver to match the accessories that are installed on the product,
or to match the settings that IT administrators make in the configuration (.CFG) file (for example,
optional trays, total amount of memory, job-storage settings, or mopier settings).
The configuration process consists of three basic steps:
●

driver acquisition

●

driver configuration

●

driver installation and deployment

These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define
the configuration.
The driver configuration process is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with
the same basic user-interface (UI) controls for interacting with the .CFG file, but are packaged

ENWW

Driver configuration for Windows

differently, either to support established product installation workflows or to leave the deployment and
installation of the driver entirely up to the user. The following tools support driver preconfiguration:
●

HP Driver Configuration Utility. The HP Driver Configuration Utility is a small, standalone,
Windows-software program that the administrator can use to open the .CFG file that is associated
with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on
the target computer. It is intended for use in environments that have an established process for
deploying drivers. This is the preconfiguration tool of choice to support any Novell or HP Print
Server Appliance (PSA) and Point and Print environments. It is used in the way that any ordinary
Windows software program is used.
The HP Driver Configuration Utility is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/dcu

●

HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration Plugin. The HP Web Jetadmin provides a queuecreation program that can be used to create printer queues on Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008. The HP Web Jetadmin Driver Configuration
Plugin adds a number of screens to the existing queue-creation workflow from which the drivers
that are being installed for the queues can be customized as part of the process. The plug-in is
limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator is not supported.
HP Web Jetadmin v10.0 is supported by the following:
◦

Windows XP (Professional only)

◦

Windows Server 2003 (R2 only)

◦

Windows Server 2008

◦

Windows Vista (Business and Enterprise Editions)

The HP Web Jetadmin print management features are supported by the following:

●

◦

Windows XP Professional (with Service Pack 2 or higher)

◦

Windows Server 2003

HP Driver Deployment Utility. The HP Driver Deployment Utility (HP DDU) was created to
simplify the deployment of print drivers onto a client computer. It is a simple utility that packages
the print-driver files, and the code needed to deploy them, into two files: an .EXE file and a .CAB
file. These files are run on the client computer to copy the print-driver files to the Windows driver
store and, for network packages, to install the product. This utility is supported on Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Vista operating systems.

To gain access to the HP DDU, insert the software CD into the CD-ROM drive, and then navigate to the
Driver Deployment Utility folder.
For more information about the HP DDU, refer to HP Driver Deployment Utility on page 44
For detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools, see the HP Driver
Configuration Support Guide at the following Web site and click on the Manuals link.
www.hp.com/go/dcu

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Lockable features
The following driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
●

Print on Both Sides (duplex). The options are True or False.

●

Print in Grayscale. The options are Disable or Enabled.

●

Media Type. The options include all the paper types that the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series product supports.

●

Paper Source. The options are Printer Auto Select, Manual Feed (Tray 1), Tray 1.

●

Job retention mode. The option is Off.

●

Orientation

●

Color Options

When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users.
Generally, the feature is unavailable in the driver UI after it has been locked.

Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the print driver to copy the latest print-driver settings
back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be
transferred when a compatible version of the print driver is used to upgrade the print driver. For
instance, if the orientation is set to Landscape for a driver originally installed in Windows XP, then the
orientation setting automatically remains Landscape when the operating system is upgraded to
Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008. The continuous export feature
functions transparently from the user's perspective and works only between print drivers of identical
product models.
NOTE: Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the exportable components are
always the same as the components that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Configuration.
Table 2-5 Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration

ENWW

Driver

Windows
XP

Windows
Server
2003

Windows
Server
2008

Windows
Vista

Windows 7

Mac OS X v10.5
and later

Linux

HP PCL 6
Print Driver

Yes

HP PCL 5
Universal
Print Driver

Yes

HP PS
Universal
Print Driver

Yes

NA: Not applicable; the driver is not supported in this operating system.

Driver configuration for Windows

HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool
The HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool is a Web-based diagnostic software that you can use to
determine whether you are using the correct and most current Windows print driver for the HP LaserJet
Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product. Two methods are available to gain access to the HP Driver
Diagnostic Printer Check Tool:
1.

Open an Internet browser.

Go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/drivercheck

Or, use this alternative method.
1.

Open an Internet browser.

Go to the HP Business Support Center (BSC) at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/bsc

Click the self-help resources link on the left navigation bar.

Click automatic driver checker to run the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool.

When the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool runs, the products that are currently installed on the
computer appear in a list. When you select the HP product that you would like to check, the HP Driver
Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers information about your product, drivers, and system setup in
order to diagnose the software driver configuration and check the print driver. The tool then verifies
whether you are using the latest driver, informs you if you are using an incorrect driver for the
HP product, and lets you know if an updated driver version is available for the product. If an updated
driver is available, you can download and install the latest driver version by clicking it.
The data that the HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check Tool gathers is stored anonymously so that HP can
analyze and continuously improve its diagnostic tools. No private data is gathered from the computer.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

HP Customer Participation Program
After the product is installed, you have the option of participating in HP's voluntary program for
communication between your system and HP. This feature, available through software that is included
on the printing-system software installation CD, helps HP monitor toner usage.
At the time of the invitation, about two weeks after installation, full disclosure of the information to be
communicated is provided. Participation is entirely voluntary, and the impact on processing and
connection speeds is negligible. Personal information is never sent to HP unless permission is given.
Figure 2-1 Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen

If you decline the invitation, the dialog box does not appear again and no data will be gathered.

ENWW

HP Customer Participation Program

Scan software
●

Scan methods

●

HP Scan software

●

Scan drivers

Scan methods
Scan from the product by using any of the following methods:
●

From the product control panel. On the product control panel, touch the Scan button. Use
the arrow buttons to select an option, and then touch the Scan button to start the scan.
NOTE: Scanning from the product control panel is possible only after the option has been
configured in the HP Scan software.
The following options are configured by default for a USB connection:
◦

If you select File, the scanned photo will be saved to a directory that you specify.

◦

If you select OCR, the scanned document will be opened in the Readiris software to convert
into an editable text document.
NOTE: This option only appears if Readiris text-recognition software is installed on the
computer. For more information, see the help on the Readiris CD.

◦

If you select EMAIL PIC, the scanned photo will be attached to a new e-mail message. You
can then add an e-mail address, add notes, and send the message.

◦

If you select EMAIL DOC, the scanned document will be attached to a new e-mail message.
You can then add an e-mail address, add notes, and send the message.

◦

If you select SETUP, the HP Scan software opens the Scan Setup Options dialog box,
where you can create, change, or delete the destination options that are available when you
touch the Scan button on the product control panel.
NOTE: Photos are scanned at 150 dpi and documents are scanned at 300 dpi.

●

From the computer by using HP Scan (Windows). Click Start, select Programs or All
Programs, select HP, select the name of the product, and then click Scan. For more
information, see HP Scan software on page 29.

●

From a WIA- or TWAIN-compliant software program. Check the help system in the
software program to learn how to scan by using a WIA- or TWAIN-compliant scanner from within
that program. For more information, see Scan drivers on page 33.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

HP Scan software
Use the HP Scan software to scan from the product and then complete any of the following tasks with
the data:
●

Save the scanned item to a file.

●

Attach the scanned item to an e-mail.

●

Perform text recognition on the scanned item through Readiris, if Readiris text-recognition software
is installed on the computer.

●

Open the scanned item with any third-party software program that supports the drag-and-drop
function.

To use the HP Scan software, click Start, select Programs or All Programs, select HP, select the
name of the product, and then click Scan.
The HP Scan software saves the scan as any of the following image file types:
●

.BMP

●

.GIF

●

.JPG

●

.PDF

●

.TIFF (both regular and compressed)

Convert a scanned document into editable text by using the Readiris software. The following editable
text file types are supported in Readiris:

ENWW

●

.BMP

●

.DCA

●

.DOC

●

.DW

●

.HTM

●

.MM

●

.PDF

●

.RTF

●

.TXT

●

.WP

●

.WPS

●

.WS

●

.WS2

Scan software

The HP Scan software uses a simple user interface with a list of shortcuts, a Restore Defaults button,
a Advanced Settings button, and a Scan button.
Figure 2-2 HP Scan dialog box

The list contains any user-defined destinations, and the following default destination options:
●

Save as PDF

●

Save as JPEG

●

E-mail as PDF

●

E-mail as JPEG

●

Save as editable text (OCR) (if Readiris software is installed)

●

Everyday Scan

After you select a destination, click Scan to start the scan.
Click Advanced Settings to open the Advanced Settings dialog box, where you can create,
change, or delete the destination options that are available in the list and specify the destination
options that are available when you press the Scan button on the product control panel. Each
destination has a unique name and scan settings associated with it.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Figure 2-3 Scan Setup Options dialog box

NOTE: The Change the destinations that show up on the all-in-one control panel
when I press the button. option appears only if HP ToolboxFX is running.
Many of the dialog boxes in the HP Scan software contain the following four common buttons:
●

Click Back to return to the previous dialog box.

●

Click Next to go to the next dialog box.

●

Click Cancel to cancel the creation or deletion of a scan destination.

●

Click Help to gain access to context-sensitive help for the dialog box.

The HP Scan software presents a series of dialog boxes that depend on the selections made in the HP
Scan software dialog boxes.

ENWW

Scan software

Every time the HP Scan software is used, an HPPSCAN6.LOG file is generated in the current user's
temporary directory. The HPPSCAN6.LOG file appends after every scan, and develops a log of
operations that helps troubleshoot scanning problems. To gain access to the log file, follow these steps:
1.

Click Start and then click Run....

Type %TEMP% in the Open: field and then click OK.

Double-click the hppscan6.log file in the window that opens.

Selecting the third-party destination option saves the scanned image in a file of the specified file type.
The HP Scan software then starts the specified software program by appending the filename after the
software filename. Because the HP Scan software does not support automatic discovery of software
programs, you must specify the correct software program and specify a file type that your program
supports.

E-mail
The HP Scan software for Windows supports only 32-bit messaging application programming interface
(MAPI)-compliant e-mail programs, and does not support Internet-based e-mail programs such as
Hotmail, Yahoo, or MSN. The following table lists examples of supported e-mail programs.
Table 2-6 Examples of supported e-mail programs
Program Name

Windows OS

Microsoft Outlook

Yes: Outlook 97, Outlook 98, Outlook 2003, Outlook XP

Microsoft Outlook Express

Yes

Lotus Notes

Yes: V3.0 and later

E-mail is always sent through the default e-mail client. To see the default e-mail client in Windows XP
(the path varies for other Windows operating system), click Start, click Settings, click Control
Panel, click Network and Internet Options, click Internet Options, click the Programs tab,
and review the E-mail setting.

Scan settings
The following table shows the available scan settings.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Table 2-7 Available scan settings
Option

Scan settings

Resolution

●

75 dpi

NOTE: Scanning at higher resolution requires longer scan
times and more memory.

●

100 dpi

●

150 dpi

●

200 dpi

●

300 dpi

●

600 dpi

●

1200 dpi

●

Black and White (1 bit)

●

Grayscale (8 bit)

●

Color (24 bit)

●

Portable Network Graphics (*.png)

●

Adobe PDF (*.pdf)

●

Searchable PDF (*.pdf)

●

JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg)

●

GIF (*.gif)

●

Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

●

TIFF (*.tiff, *.tif)

●

Rich Text (*.rtf)

●

Text (*txt)

●

Entire Scan Area

●

Letter (8.5 x 11 inches)

●

Legal (8.5 x 14 inches) *Document Feeder Only

●

A4 (210 x 297 mm)

●

3.5 x 5 in (9 x 13 cm)

●

4 x 6 in (10 x 15 cm)

●

5 x 7 in (13 x 18 cm)

●

8 x 10 in (20 x 25 cm)

●

Custom Scan Size

Image type (bit depth)

File type

Size to scan

Scan drivers
●

ENWW

WIA driver

Scan software

WIA driver
NOTE: The WIA driver does not support duplex scanning.
Use any of the following methods to open the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) scanning feature for
Windows XP:
●

Start WIA scanning through a WIA-compliant software program.

●

Right-click on the scanner icon in the My Computer folder, and then click Scan.

●

Right-click on the scanner icon in the My Computer folder, and then click Scanner Wizard.

●

Right-click on the scanner icon in the Scanners and Cameras folder in the Control Panel,
and then click Scan.

●

Right-click on the scanner icon in the Scanners and Cameras folder in the Control Panel,
and then click Scanner Wizard.

The WIA user interface is relatively simple and does not contain the wide range of image-quality
options that are available in the TWAIN-driver user interface.
Figure 2-4 WIA-driver user interface — flatbed

When you use the WIA scan driver, you must modify the brightness and contrast after you perform the
scan. Contrast or brightness modifications cannot be set on the product. Only native product resolutions
are supported, and no software interpolation is performed. The WIA scan driver supports document

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

feeder or flatbed scanning, but does not support duplex scanning. The WIA scan driver supports the
following file types:
●

.BMP

●

.JPG

●

.GIF

●

.TIFF

●

.FPX

●

.PNG

NOTE: For more information about scanning, see the HP LaserJet CM1410 MFP Series User Guide,
which is available on the printing-system CD that came with the product.

HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility
The HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility runs automatically after the printing-system software is installed.
HP recommends that you run the utility to configure the fax settings for both the software and the
product control panel. Run the utility even if you have already configured the fax settings. The settings
in the HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility are used by HP ToolboxFX to run other faxing features, such
as the fax cover page.
NOTE: You can also start the HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility by clicking Start, selecting
Programs or All Programs, selecting HP, selecting the name of the product, and then clicking HP
Fax Setup Wizard.
NOTE: For more information about faxing, see the HP LaserJet CM1410 MFP Series User Guide,
which is available on the printing-system CD that came with the product.

ENWW

HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility

HP LaserJet Send Fax software
Use the HP LaserJet Send Fax software to send faxes from the computer. To use the HP LaserJet
Send Fax software, click Start, select Programs or All Programs, select HP, select the name of
the product, and then click Send Fax.
Figure 2-5 HP LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – user interface

NOTE: The HP LaserJet Send Fax software works with HP ToolboxFX. If you turn off
HP ToolboxFX, you cannot use some of the HP LaserJet Send Fax software features, such as the fax
phone book. However, you can still preview and send faxes.
In some cases, faxing from the computer is more convenient and offers more choices than faxing from
the product control panel, such as in the following:
●

Fax to multiple recipients

●

Create a cover page

●

Fax pages scanned from the product document feeder

●

Fax without first printing and scanning the document

For any fax job, click Preview... to view the fax and click Send Now to send the fax.
NOTE: For more information about faxing, see the HP LaserJet CM1410 MFP Series User Guide,
which is available on the printing-system installation CD that came with the product.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Fax to multiple recipients
To send a fax to multiple recipients, use the HP LaserJet Send Fax software to create a recipient list
by using one of the following methods:
●

Click Create Recipient List on the HP LaserJet Send Fax dialog box. For each recipient,
type in the information and then click Add to list.

●

If you have stored entries in the fax phone book in HP ToolboxFX, click Phone Book on the HP
LaserJet Send Fax dialog box, click Create Recipient List, and then drag-and-drop recipient
names from the Phone Book field to the Recipient List field. To add new entries to the fax
phone book in HP ToolboxFX, click Edit to open HP ToolboxFX.
NOTE: If you add new entries in HP ToolboxFX, click Refresh on the HP LaserJet Send Fax
dialog box to see the new entries in the Phone Book field.

Create a cover page
If you want a cover page for the fax, select Cover Page in the Include With Fax options.
Your name, company name, phone number, and fax number are entered automatically into the coverpage template. Edit the data for the cover-page template by using one of the following methods:
●

Enter the data for the cover page in the HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility.

●

Enter the data for the cover page on the product control panel.

●

Enter the data for the cover page by clicking Defaults and then clicking Edit.

When you select Cover Page, the Notes section appears. To view a completed cover-page template,
select one from the drop-down menu and then click Preview.
NOTE: Cover page templates are not editable.

Fax pages scanned from the product document feeder
If you want to include fax pages scanned from the product document feeder, place the pages to be
scanned in the product document feeder and select Pages in Document Tray in the Include With
Fax options.

Fax without first printing and scanning the document
One of the most useful features of the HP LaserJet Send Fax software is the ability to fax documents
without first printing and scanning them. For example, if you want to send a Microsoft Word document,
open the document, click File, click Print, and then select HP LaserJet CM1410 MFP Fax from the
drop-down menu.
The HP LaserJet Send Fax software starts with the document attached. Add a cover page by
selecting Cover Page. Add pages scanned from the product document feeder by selecting Pages in
Document Tray.

ENWW

HP LaserJet Send Fax software

Font support
The basic fonts listed here are included with Microsoft Windows software. The additional PS fonts are
available on the CD that came with the product.

Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printing
product:
●

Arial

●

Courier New Italic

●

Times New Roman Italic

●

Arial Italic

●

Courier New Bold

●

Times New Roman Bold

●

Arial Bold

●

Courier New Bold Italic

●

Times New Roman Bold Italic

●

Arial Bold Italic

●

Symbol

●

Wingdings

●

Courier New

●

Times New Roman

Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a Full Installation of the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series printing-system software.
Table 2-8 Default fonts

Font name

Font style

File name

Albertus Extra Bold

Regular

ALBR85W.TTF

Albertus Medium

Regular

ALBR55W.TTF

Antique Olive

Regular

OLVR55W.TTF

Antique Olive

Bold

OLVR75W.TTF

Antique Olive

Italic

OLVR56W.TTF

CG Omega

Regular

CGOR45W.TTF

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Table 2-8 Default fonts (continued)

ENWW

Font name

Font style

File name

CG Omega

Bold

CGOR65W.TTF

CG Omega

Bold Italic

CGOR66W.TTF

CG Omega

Italic

CGOR46W.TTF

CG Times

Regular

CGTR45W.TTF

CG Times

Bold

CGTR65W.TTF

CG Times

Bold Italic

CGTR66W.TTF

CG Times

Italic

CGTR46W.TTF

Clarendon Condensed

Bold

CLAR67W.TTF

Coronet

Regular

CORONET.TTF

CourierPS

Regular

CPSR45W.TTF

CourierPS

Bold

CPSR65W.TTF

CourierPS

Bold Oblique

CPSR66W.TTF

CourierPS

Oblique

CPSR46W.TTF

Garamond

Antiqua

GARR45W.TTF

Garamond

Halbfett

GARR65W.TTF

Garamond

Kursiv

GARR46W.TTF

Garamond

Kursiv Halbfett

GARR66W.TTF

Helvetica

Regular

HELR45W.TTF

Helvetica

Bold

HELR65W.TTF

Helvetica

Bold Oblique

HELR66W.TTF

Helvetica Narrow

Regular

HELR47W.TTF

Helvetica Narrow

Bold

HELR67W.TTF

Helvetica Narrow

Bold Oblique

HELR68W.TTF

Helvetica Narrow

Oblique

HELR48W.TTF

Helvetica

Oblique

HELR46W.TTF

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

Book

AVGR45W.TTF

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

Book Oblique

AVGR46W.TTF

ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi

Regular

AVGR65W.TTF

ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi

Oblique

AVGR66W.TTF

ITC Bookman Light

Regular

BOKR35W.TTF

ITC Bookman Light

Italic

BOKR36W.TTF

ITC Bookman Demi

Regular

BOKR75W.TTF

Font support

Table 2-8 Default fonts (continued)
Font name

Font style

File name

ITC Bookman Demi

Italic

BOKR76W.TTF

ITC Zapf Chancery

Medium Italic

CHANC___.TTF

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Regular

DINGS___.TTF

Letter Gothic

Regular

LETR45W.TTF

Letter Gothic

Bold

LETR65W.TTF

Letter Gothic

Italic

LETR46W.TTF

Marigold

Regular

MARIGOLD.TTF

New Century Schoolbook

Bold

NCSR75W.TTF

New Century Schoolbook

Bold Italic

NCSR76W.TTF

New Century Schoolbook

Italic

NCSR56W.TTF

New Century Schoolbook

Roman

NCSR55W.TTF

Palatino

Bold

PALR65W.TTF

Palatino

Bold Italic

PALR66W.TTF

Palatino

Italic

PALR46W.TTF

Palatino

Roman

PALR45W.TTF

SymbolPS

Regular

SYMPS__.TTF

Times*

Bold

TIMR65W.TTF

Times

Bold Italic

TIMR66W.TTF

Times

Italic

TIMR46W.TTF

Times

Roman

TIMR45W.TTF

Univers

Bold

UNVR65W.TTF

Univers

Bold Italic

UNVR66W.TTF

Univers Condensed

Bold

UNVR67W.TTF

Univers Condensed

Bold Italic

UNVR68W.TTF

Univers Condensed

Medium

UNVR57W.TTF

Univers Condensed

Medium Italic

UNVR58W.TTF

Univers

Medium

UNVR55W.TTF

Univers

Medium Italic

UNVR56W.TTF

Ninety-two additional PS emulation fonts are also available on the CD.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Table 2-9 Additional PS emulation fonts

ENWW

Font name

Font style

File name

Albertus MT

Regular

PS_12639.TTF

Albertus MT

Italic

PS_12640.TTF

Albertus MT Lt

Regular

PS_14530.TTF

Antique Olive CompactPS

Regular

PS_11120.TTF

Antique Olive Roman

Regular

PS_11119.TTF

Antique Olive Roman

Bold

PS_11118.TTF

Antique Olive Roman

Italic

PS_11846.TTF

Apple Chancery

Italic

PS_24516.TTF

Bodoni Poster

Regular

PS_12704.TTF

Bodoni PosterCompressed

Regular

PS_14508.TTF

BodoniPS

Regular

PS_12581.TTF

BodoniPS

Bold

PS_12585.TTF

BodoniPS

Bold Italic

PS_12586.TTF

BodoniPS

Italic

PS_12582.TTF

Candid

Regular

PS_24517.TTF

Chicago

Regular

PS_24518.TTF

Clarendon Light

Regular

PS_14513.TTF

ClarendonPS

Regular

PS_10269.TTF

ClarendonPS

Bold

PS_12968.TTF

Cooper Black

Regular

PS_10369.TTF

Cooper Black

Italic

PS_10370.TTF

Copperplate32bc

Regular

PS_14514.TTF

Copperplate33bc

Regular

PS_14515.TTF

CoronetPS

Italic

PS_10249.TTF

Eurostile

Regular

PS_10267.TTF

Eurostile Bold

Regular

PS_10268.TTF

Eurostile ExtendedTwo

Bold

PS_14512.TTF

Eurostile ExtendedTwo

Regular

PS_14511.TTF

Geneva

Regular

PS_24509.TTF

GillSans

Regular

PS_13872.TTF

GillSans

Bold

PS_13874.TTF

Font support

Table 2-9 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

Font name

Font style

File name

GillSans

Bold Italic

PS_13875.TTF

GillSans Condensed

Regular

PS_14053.TTF

GillSans Condensed

Bold

PS_14054.TTF

GillSans ExtraBold

Regular

PS_14051.TTF

GillSans

Italic

PS_13873.TTF

GillSans Light

Italic

PS_13871.TTF

GillSans Light

Regular

PS_13870.TTF

Goudy

Bold

PS_12544.TTF

Goudy

Bold Italic

PS_10695.TTF

Goudy

Regular

PS_12542.TTF

Goudy ExtraBold

Regular

PS_12545.TTF

Goudy

Italic

PS_12543.TTF

Helvetica Condensed

Regular

PS_14526.TTF

Helvetica Condensed

Bold

PS_14528.TTF

Helvetica Condensed

Bold Italic

PS_14529.TTF

Helvetica Condensed

Italic

PS_14527.TTF

Hoefler Text

Regular

PS_24519.TTF

Hoefler Text Black

Regular

PS_24521.TTF

Hoefler Text Black

Italic

PS_24522.TTF

Hoefler Text

Italic

PS_24520.TTF

Hoefler Text Ornaments

Regular

PS_24523.TTF

Joanna MT

Regular

PS_14503.TTF

Joanna MT

Bold

PS_14505.TTF

Joanna MT

Bold Italic

PS_14506.TTF

Joanna MT

Italic

PS_14504.TTF

Letter Gothic

Italic

PS_13778.TTF

Letter GothicPS

Regular

PS_13777.TTF

Letter GothicPS

Bold

PS_13779.TTF

Letter GothicPS

Bold Italic

PS_13780.TTF

Lubalin Graph

Regular

PS_12675.TTF

Lubalin Graph

Bold

PS_12677.TTF

Lubalin Graph

Bold Italic

PS_12625.TTF

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Table 2-9 Additional PS emulation fonts (continued)

ENWW

Font name

Font style

File name

Lubalin Graph

Italic

PS_12623.TTF

MarigoldPS

Regular

PS_94073.TTF

Mona Lisa Recut

Regular

PS_14525.TTF

Monaco

Regular

PS_24524.TTF

New York

Regular

PS_24510.TTF

Optima

Regular

PS_12506.TTF

Optima

Bold

PS_12510.TTF

Optima

Bold Italic

PS_12511.TTF

Optima

Italic

PS_12507.TTF

Oxford

Italic

PS_14072.TTF

StempelGaramond Roman

Italic

PS_11546.TTF

StempelGaramond Roman

Regular

PS_11545.TTF

StempelGaramond Roman

Bold

PS_11547.TTF

StempelGaramond Roman

Bold Italic

PS_11548.TTF

Taffy

Regular

PS_14507.TTF

Univers 45 Light

Regular

PS_13501.TTF

Univers 45 Light

Bold

PS_14023.TTF

Univers 45 Light

Bold Italic

PS_14024.TTF

Univers 45 Light

Italic

PS_13502.TTF

Univers 47 CondensedLight

Bold

PS_14030.TTF

Univers 47 CondensedLight

Bold Italic

PS_14040.TTF

Univers 55

Regular

PS_14021.TTF

Univers 55

Italic

PS_14022.TTF

Univers 57 Condensed

Regular

PS_14029.TTF

Univers 57 Condensed

Italic

PS_14039.TTF

Univers ExtendedPS

Bold

PS_13548.TTF

Univers ExtendedPS

Regular

PS_13547.TTF

Univers ExtendedPS

Bold Italic

PS_14481.TTF

Univers ExtendedPS

Italic

PS_14480.TTF

Font support

HP Driver Deployment Utility
The HP Driver Deployment Utility (HP DDU) was created to simplify the deployment of print drivers onto
a client computer. It is a simple utility that packages the printer-driver files, and the code needed to
deploy them, into 2 files: an .EXE file and a .CAB file. These files are run on the client computer to copy
the printer-driver files to the Windows driver store, and for network packages, to install the product.
The HP DDU works with print drivers that can be installed by an .INF file. It is designed to work with
print drivers that have their files contained in one directory structure. Because this utility is generic, it
does not detect how specific print drivers are packaged. It packages all files in the directory (and
subdirectories) where the print driver .INF file is found. The print driver must be expanded so that the
HP DDU can process the .INF file. If you download an .EXE file with the print-driver files, you need to
run it first to unpack all of the files. Then, run the HP DDU to package it for deployment on the client
system.
HP DDU can be used to pre-configure a print driver for deployment. When the package is run on the
client computer, the new configuration file is used to configure the print driver after it is installed. This
does not break WHQL certification.
If the print driver was WHQL certified, and the print-driver files are organized within one directory
structure, then HP DDU will not break WHQL certification. HP DDU packages all of the files found in the
printer-driver directory structure without modifying them. If printer-driver pre-configuration is done, the
new configuration file is used to configure the print driver after it is installed. This does not break
WHQL certification.
NOTE: If you need the ability to configure unique settings for printer-driver deployment, the Universal
Print Driver installer may be a better choice as an install tool. The Universal Print Driver installer allows
the configuration of settings from the command line.
The HP DDU can be used with the Universal Print Driver installer, but the Universal Print Driver
command line will not be accessible. The HP DDU is designed to package and stage/install print
drivers. Print-driver specific features, like those found in the Universal Print Driver installer, are specific
to the Universal Print Driver installer and not supported by the HP DDU.
The HP DDU installer could be used with the Universal Print Drivers to deploy a direct connect driver in
traditional mode or a network install in traditional mode.
NOTE: Administrative rights are necessary on the client system where the install is being performed.
For a direct connect, administrative rights are only required to run the .EXE package. The user can then
connect the product without administrative rights. For a network connection, the .EXE package will copy
files to the driver store, create the port, install the print driver and create the printer object.
Supported operating systems

●

Microsoft Windows XP

●

Microsoft Windows XP 64-Bit Edition

●

Microsoft Windows Server 2003

●

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 64-Bit Edition

●

Microsoft Windows Server 2008

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

●

Microsoft Windows Server 2008 64-Bit Edition

●

Microsoft Windows Vista

●

Microsoft Windows Vista (64-bit)

●

Microsoft Windows 7

Install and run the HP DDU
Install the HP DDU
Copy the files to the administrative computer. If using the self-extracting .EXE file, just copy it to the
administrative computer, then double click – it will expand the files into the proper directory structure.
DDU does not require an installation program. All of the files are contained in the “Driver Deployment
Utility” directory. DDU does not require any registry entries.
Run the HP DDU
1.

Create the printer-driver package to deploy by opening the HP DDU application. This can be done
by double clicking HPDDU.EXE, which is found in the Driver Deployment Utility root directory. This
utility packages the print driver and the code needed to stage/install the print driver into an .EXE
file and a .CAB file. An informational .XML file is also created and can be used to identify the
package selections.

Run the new printer-driver package (created in step 1) on the client computer. It can be copied to
the client computer and run by double clicking, or it can be run from a server by pointing to it and
double clicking. The package can also be run in a batch file.

For a direct connect package, the HP DDU will silently copy the printer-driver files into the
Windows driver store and exit. Prior to exiting, an optional dialog can be shown to prompt the user to
connect their product after the files are copied. Upon completion of the package executable, when the
user connects the product to the computer, the operating system will install the product using Plug and
Play software.
NOTE: If the product is never connected to the computer, the product will not be installed.
For a network package, the HP DDU will silently copy the printer-driver files into the Windows
driver store, and then install the product using the network information entered by the administrator.
Use the HP DDU
The HP DDU user interface is divided into the following sections:

ENWW

●

Package Source describes the package type and printer-driver location that you want to create.

●

Package Target identifies the name and location of the installation package.

●

Create Package initiates the package creation process.

HP Driver Deployment Utility

Figure 2-6 Package Source

Driver Directory—Use the Select Driver button to enter the directory where the print driver resides
by browsing or typing it in. You should only have one printer-driver package in this directory because
this utility will package all the files found in this directory (and sub directories) into the executable file. If
you have downloaded a compressed printer-driver package, you must expand it before using this
utility.
In some cases, you may have multiple print-driver .INF files in the directory (sometimes one is for color
and another for mono products). In this case, an additional dialog will allow you to select which print
driver to package.
You will also get a warning if the directory is large. This is to help prevent packaging more than one
print driver. You can choose to continue or not at this point.
Once the printer-driver directory is selected, and one print driver has been found, the printer-driver
information is displayed below the directory selection box.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

For print drivers that support preconfiguration, the check box below will be enabled. Selecting this will
run a configuration dialog after clicking the Create Package.
Install Type—Silently preload the driver is the option to select for users that will be using a
direct connection, like a USB cable. A future Plug and Play event will be necessary to install the print
driver, but all the files will be installed in the Windows driver store by this package for future use.
By default the executable file runs silently. If you would like to prompt the end user to connect the
product at the end of the install, select the Show a prompt to connect the printer checkbox.
For products using a network connection, select the Silently create the network port and install
driver option. The Network Settings button will become enabled, and you should click on it to
enter the required network settings.
NOTE: If you do not select the print driver first, an error dialog box appears. You must select the print
driver first so that the product name can be derived from the printer-driver name.
Figure 2-7 Network Settings

You must identify the network product by one of the following methods. This utility does not
communicate with the product to determine if the settings are valid, but it does perform syntax

ENWW

HP Driver Deployment Utility

checking. The administrator is responsible for identifying the product using either the correct IP address,
the Hardware address, or the Hostname.
●

IP Address — enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the product.

●

Hardware Address — enter the hardware address of the product.

●

Hostname — enter the hostname of the product.

The following network settings are additional. You may accept the default values pre-entered or change
any of them.
●

Port Name: This is the network port name that will be created. If the name already exists, a
number will be appended to make it unique.

●

Printer Name: This is the product name that will appear in the printers’ folder. If the name
already exists, a number will be appended to make it unique.

●

Set this printer as default:
◦

Yes - will make this product the default when printing from other applications.

◦

No - will retain the current default, unless this is the only product installed.

●

Share this printer: Yes - will allow others to use this product.

●

Share Name: Share name for the product. Only enabled if ‘Share this printer’ is Yes. If the
name already exists, a number will be appended to make it unique.

To exit the Network Settings dialog without saving, use the Windows close button in the upper corner.
Package Target
Use the Save as button to enter the name and location for the output package by browsing or typing it
in. The utility will create the package in the temp directory and then move it to the final location.
Create Package
Click the Create Package button when you have entered all the above information. This button will
be disabled until you have entered the required information. Once it is clicked, the Cancel button and
Progress bar will be enabled.
To stop the package creation, click the Cancel button.
The executable file runs silently, unless a user prompt is requested for a direct-connect product. If an
error is encountered during execution, an error dialog will appear. To suppress the error dialog, select
the Suppress all end user error messages check box.
If you selected the Pre-configure this driver checkbox, the print driver configuration dialog will
open when you click the Create Package button. Once you have configured the print driver, select
OK to save the new configuration settings and continue creating the package. Clicking Cancel will
cancel the entire package creation process.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Figure 2-8 HP DDU Driver Configuration settings

HP DDU Frequently Asked Questions
How do I use the HP DDU to deploy a direct connect driver with preconfiguration?
If you load multiple PDLs for one product, the operating system will determine which one satisfies the
Plug and Play event. The operating system will create one printer object for that PDL.
1.

Run HPDDU.EXE to start the package creation.

From Package Source section:

Select the print driver to package by browsing to the .INF file in the directory.

Select the Pre-configuration checkbox. This checkbox is enabled only for print drivers that
support preconfiguration.

Select the Silently preload the driver install type.

Select the Show a prompt to connect the printer checkbox if you want to prompt the
user after the files are copied.

From Package Target section:
Select the output name and location. Three files will be written here: an .EXE file, a .CAB file, and
an .XML file with information about the package.

ENWW

HP Driver Deployment Utility

From Create Package section:
a.

If you want to suppress any error messages, select the Suppress all end user error
messages checkbox.

Click the Create Package button

Run the new .EXE file from the client computer. You must have administrator rights to run the .EXE
file because it will be copying files into the Windows driver store. Now the printer-driver files are
on the system, and any user can connect the product to trigger the Plug and Play event.
NOTE: The printer object is not created until the product is connected.

NOTE: If you deploy multiple direct connect print drivers, with preconfiguration, and they all use a
pre-config file with the same name, the first one connected will be the only one configured properly.
This might happen if you deploy the PCL6 and PCL5 print drivers for the same product. The reason is
that the config file is copied to the \3 directory awaiting the product being connected. Each
deployment will just copy over the same config file since they all use the same name. Once the product
is connected, this config file gets consumed and deleted. Future Plug and Play events will not have the
config file available.
How do I use the HP DDU to deploy a network product with preconfiguration?
NOTE: Before running the HP DDU, you must download the driver you want to package, expand the
driver, and place the driver in its own directory on the computer where the HP DDU will run.
1.

Run HPDDU.EXE to create the package.

From Package Source section:

Select the print driver to package by browsing to the .INF file in the directory.

Select the Pre-configuration checkbox. This checkbox is enabled only for print drivers that
support preconfiguration.

Select the Silently create network port and install driver install type.

Click the Network Settings button to enter the network settings.

From Network Settings dialog:
a.

From the Required Settings section, enter at least one way of identifying the product (IP
address, Hardware address, or Hostname).

Make any changes to the Additional Settings section (port name, product name, default
printer, sharing and share name). You can leave the default settings if you don’t need to
make changes.

From Package Target section:
Select the output name and location. Three files will be written here: an .EXE file, a .CAB file and
an .XML file with information about the package.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

From Create Package section:
a.

If you want to suppress any error messages, select the Suppress all end user error
messages checkbox.

Click the Create Package button.

The configuration dialog will open and allow you to set configuration details for this print
driver. After accepting the configuration changes, the package will be created.

Run the new .EXE file from the client computer. You must have administrator rights to run the .EXE
file because it will be copying files into the Windows driver store. A port and printer object will be
created with the information provided above.

Common Problems
I get a warning when I select the print driver.
If there are too many files in the driver directory, or the directory is really large, a warning appears so
that the user doesn’t accidentally package up something they didn’t intend to (like the root directory).
Some print drivers are really large, and you can choose to ignore this warning and continue.
To minimize package size, each print driver should be in it’s own directory. This is usually the default
behavior when you expand a print driver.
I get an error when I try to open the “Network Settings” dialog.
You need to first select a print driver before opening the “Network Settings” dialog. This populates the
product name field based on the printer-driver name.
The Create Package button is not enabled.
This button will not be enabled until you have:
1.

Selected the print driver.

If network connect – filled out one of the required network settings.

Selected the Save as name and directory.

How do I exit the HP DDU?
Use the Windows close button in the upper corner.
The Network Settings dialog keeps displaying an error, and I just want out.
If you do not want to save settings, or change your mind and don’t want a network install, you need to
close the network settings dialog with the Windows close button in the upper corner. Using the OK
button, will try to validate the settings, and that is what is causing an error.
What if the user connects the printer before the HP DDU package is run?
If the user connects the product, but then cancels the Plug and Play event before it finishes, this creates
an incomplete Plug and Play event. After copying the printer-driver files to the Windows driver store,
the HP DDU code will cleanup incomplete Plug and Play events for products supported by this print
driver. Then it will refresh the bus, causing the operating system to Plug and Play the product (installing
the print driver and creating the printer object.)

ENWW

HP Driver Deployment Utility

How do I uninstall HP DDU?
Delete all the files in the root HP DDU directory.
NOTE: No registry changes have been made with this utility.

Chapter 2 Windows software description

ENWW

Install Windows printing-system
components

The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series comes with software and installers for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh systems. For information about Macintosh software, see Macintosh
software and utilities on page 111. Linux and UNIX systems support the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410
Color MFP Series, and software is available on the Web. This chapter provides procedures for
installing and uninstalling the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series printing-system software for
Windows operating systems.

ENWW

●

Install overview

●

Software installation types for Windows

●

Installation options

●

General Windows installation instructions

Install overview
The software for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product is available from the printingsystem software CD.
For all supported operating systems, each install option presents a series of screens that guide you
through the installation process.

Software installation types for Windows
The following printing-system software installation types are available:
●

Select the recommended software (default)

●

Select the minimum software

Selecting Click here for more install options allows you to choose between the installation types
and allows you to view the software components that are installed with each installation type.
The installer guides the installation, whether you are configuring a direct-connected or a networkconnected product.
The installer additionally detects hardware and network connections, and helps guide the installation.
For example, if the installer detects an HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series, it automatically
configures the software connection to that product. This saves several steps. If the installer detects fax
capabilities or a network, it also guides setting up those features.

Installation options
The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series printing-system software can be installed when the
product is connected to the computer in the following configurations:

●

on a computer that is directly connected to the product through a USB port. Directly connected via
a USB port

●

Connected via a wired or wireless network

Chapter 3 Install Windows printing-system components

ENWW

General Windows installation instructions
●

General Windows installation for direct connections

●

General Windows installation for network connections

●

Printer sharing disclaimer

●

Point-and-Print installation for Windows

●

Modify a pre-existing installation

General Windows installation for direct connections
●

Windows installation instructions for direct-connected (USB) products

●

Printer-driver only installation instructions (Microsoft Add Printer Wizard)

Windows installation instructions for direct-connected (USB) products
Use the following instructions to install the printing-system software on a computer that is running Win
7, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, or Windows Vista, and is directly connected to the product.
NOTE: Set up and turn on the product before installing the software. Do not connect the product to
the computer until the software installation program prompts you.
You must have administrator privileges to install the software.
1.

Quit all open programs.

Insert the printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE: If the CD-ROM does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to
and double-click the SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the printing-system software CD.

Click the appropriate installation type, and then follow the onscreen prompts.

When the installer software prompts you to select how the product will be connected, select
Directly to this computer using a USB cable., and then click Next. Follow the onscreen
prompts.

If you are prompted to restart the computer, click Yes.

After installation of the printing-system software, dialog boxes appear that allow you to print a test
page, register the product over the Web, and set up faxing on the product.

Printer-driver only installation instructions (Microsoft Add Printer Wizard)
NOTE: This printer-driver only software solution provides print-only functionality through a
communications port that has already been created for this product (USB or network connected). Fax
and scan functionality are not included with this software.

ENWW

General Windows installation instructions

To use the printer-driver only software solution with a direct USB connection, a USB Print port must have
already been created by a previous installation of the printing-system software. There are several direct
USB printing-system software installation options that establish a USB Print port:
●

Complete an installation using the in-box printing-system software CD.

●

Download the "Recommended Solution", which provides installation options identical to the
printing-system software CD.

Once a USB Print port is created by a previous direct USB installation, the printer-driver installation can
be completed using that USB Print port.
Use the following instructions to install the printer driver only:
1.

Click Start, and then do one of the following:
-orFor Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP Professional: Select Settings, and then click
Printers and Faxes.
-orFor Windows XP Home: Click Control Panel, and then double-click the Printers and Other
Hardware icon.
-orFor Windows Vista: Click Computer, click Control Panel, and then click Hardware and
Sound.

Click Add Printer, and then click Next.

When asked if the product is a local or network product, select Local printer attached to this
computer, and then click Next.
NOTE: Do not select the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer
option.

On the Select a Printer Port screen, select the USB Print port that was created by a previous
USB installation, and then click Next.

On the Install Printer Software screen, click Have Disk.... The Install from Disk dialog
box appears.

Insert the printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

Click Browse..., and then select the printer driver for the product.
To install the PCL 6 printer driver, navigate to the root folder of the CD (where X is the letter of the
CD-ROM drive) and select the hppdp608.inf file.

Chapter 3 Install Windows printing-system components

ENWW

To install the HP postscript level 3 emulation printer driver, navigate to the appropriate folder and
select the appropriate file:
●

For 32-bit: \Drivers\win2k_xp_vista\hppcps08.inf

●

For 64-bit: \Drivers\winxp_vistax64\hppdps08.inf

Click Open.

On the Install from Disk dialog box, click OK.

10. Click Next. Complete the installation. When prompted, print a test page to ensure that the printer
driver is installed correctly.

General Windows installation for network connections
●

Network setup

●

Windows installation instructions for network-connected products

●

Printer-driver only installation instructions (Microsoft Add Printer Wizard)

Network setup
NOTE: Set up, turn on, and connect the product to the network before installing the software.
To connect a product to a network, use the following instructions:
1.

Connect the product to the network.

Turn on the product.
NOTE: You must complete the power-up sequence in this order or the installer discovery utility
fails to recognize the product. It might take a few minutes for the product to obtain a TCP/IP
address.

To print a configuration page from the product control panel, touch Setup . Use the arrow
buttons to select Reports, and then touch OK. Use the arrow buttons to select Config Report
and then touch OK.

Install the printing-system software. Use the information from the test pages to specify the network
variables during installation.

NOTE: A second page prints. On that page, the Fax Settings and Imaging Settings sections
provide details about the product fax settings.

Windows installation instructions for network-connected products
NOTE: Complete the network setup before completing this procedure.
Each computer that has the printing-system software installed can use all of the product features that are
available over a network connection, except for the Receive faxes to this computer feature,
which can only be enabled for one computer.

ENWW

General Windows installation instructions

Use the following instructions to install the printing-system software on a computer that is running Win
7, Windows XP, or Windows Vista, and is connected to the product through a network.
NOTE: You must have administrator privileges to install the software.
1.

Quit all open programs.

Click the appropriate installation type and follow the onscreen prompts.

When the installer software prompts you to select how the product will be connected, select
Connect through a wired network.. Follow the onscreen prompts.

If you are prompted to restart the computer, click Yes.

After installation of the printing-system software, a test page prints, and dialog boxes appear that
allow you to register the product over the Web and set up faxing.

Click Add Printer, and then click Next.

When asked if the product is a local or network product, select A network printer, or a
printer attached to another computer, and then click Next.
NOTE: Use of a local port is recommended, if it is available. If no local port is available, create
a new TCP/IP port.

Chapter 3 Install Windows printing-system components

ENWW

On the Install Printer Software screen, click Have Disk.... The Install from Disk dialog
box appears.

Insert the printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.

Click Browse..., and then select the printer driver for the product.
To install the PCL 6 printer driver, navigate to the root folder of the CD and select the
hppdp608.inf file.
To install the HP postscript level 3 emulation printer driver, navigate to the appropriate folder and
select the appropriate file:
●

For 32-bit: \Drivers\win2k_xp_vista\hppcps08.inf

●

For 64-bit: \Drivers\winxp_vistax64\hppdps08.inf

Click Open.

On the Install from Disk dialog box, click OK.

Click Next. Complete the installation. When prompted, print a test page to ensure that the printer
driver is installed correctly.

Printer sharing disclaimer
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems
and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com.

Point-and-Print installation for Windows
Use the following information to install a printer driver by using the Microsoft Point-and-Print feature
when you do not connect directly to the product on the network.
Point-and-Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step printer driver installation process. The first
step is to install a shared printer driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the
print server from a network client so that the client can use the printer driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing printer drivers by using Point-and-Print. If these
procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft. HP provides printer drivers that are compatible with
the Point-and-Print feature, but this is a function of the Windows operating systems, not of HP printer
drivers.
Administrator privileges are necessary to install the printer driver.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one in which all of the clients and servers are running
in the same operating system), the same printer driver version that is vended from the server to the
clients in a Point-and-Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the
server. However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run
on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a version of the printer
driver that is different from the one on the print server.
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that, starting with Windows
2000 and continuing with all future operating systems, printer drivers would run as user-mode
processes. User-mode drivers run in a protected part of the operating system, as do all of the normal

ENWW

General Windows installation instructions

end-user processes and software programs. A user-mode printer driver that functions incorrectly can
terminate (or “crash”) only the process in which it is running—not the whole operating system. Because
access to critical system resources is restricted, overall operating system stability is increased.

Modify a pre-existing installation
If an HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series MFP Series has been installed, the initial Installer
screen on the printing-system installation CD changes to the Welcome Back! screen. A pre-existing
installation also changes the sequence of installation screens.
Figure 3-1 Installer screen — Welcome Back!

The Welcome Back! screen contains the following options:

●

Uninstall. Click this option to uninstall the printing-system software.

●

Connect another HP LaserJet Device. Click this option to quickly install another HP product
using software that is already loaded on the computer.

●

More Options. Click this option to open the product documentation on the CD (including the
User Guide), Admin Documentation and Software, ot to gain access to specialized drivers and
product support on the Web.

●

Cancel. Click this button to close the Installer.

Chapter 3 Install Windows printing-system components

ENWW

HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS
Universal Print Driver for Windows

Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PCL 6 Print Driver
for, Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Server
2008 (32-bit and 64-bit), Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit), and Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit).
You can control print jobs from several places:
●

the product control panel

●

the software program print dialog box

●

the driver user interface

Generally, for features that are duplicated in more than one location (for instance, you can select the
paper input tray from any of them), settings that are established in the software program take
precedence over print-driver settings. Print-driver settings, in turn, override product control-panel
settings.
When you install the printing-system software in Windows, the HP PCL 6 Print Driver is installed by
default through the installer. The HP PS Universal Print Driver and the HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver
can be installed by downloading the software from the Web.
Topics:

ENWW

●

Access print drivers

●

Help system

●

Advanced tab features

●

Paper/Quality tab features

●

Effects tab features

●

Finishing tab features

●

Color tab features

●

Services tab features

●

Device Settings tab features

Introduction

●

Printing Shortcuts tab features

●

About tab features

Access print drivers
Depending on the operating system on which you are installing the print drivers, you can gain access
to the print drivers and different print-driver interfaces in several ways.
To gain access to the print-driver settings from within most software programs, follow these steps:
1.

Click File.

Click Print.

Click Properties.

The appearance and names of the driver tabs can vary, depending on the operating system. These
driver settings apply only while that software program is open.
You can control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. Here you have access to two sets of driver
tabs: the Printing Preferences tabs and the Properties tabs. The settings that you make on the
Printing Preferences driver tabs control the driver default settings for each user's profile. Installable
options can be configured in Properties driver tabs.

Printing Preferences driver tabs
The Printing Preferences driver tabs change the default settings that are used across all software
programs. To gain access to these tabs, follow these steps:
1.

Right-click the product icon.

Click Printing Preferences.

The following Printing Preferences print-driver tabs are available:

●

Advanced

●

Printing Shortcuts

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

●

Services

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Properties driver tabs
This set of tabs controls the driver behavior and driver connections. To gain access to the Properties
tabs, follow these steps:
1.

Right-click the product icon.

Click Properties.

The following Properties print-driver tabs are available:

ENWW

●

General

●

Sharing

●

Ports

●

Advanced

●

Color Management

●

Security

●

Device Settings

●

About

Access print drivers

Help system
The HP PCL 6 Print Driver includes a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and
configuration options.

“What's this?” Help
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Vista, and Windows 7
support What's this? Help. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the
following ways:
●

Right-click a feature or control. A pop-up Help window appears.

●

Click the ? button in the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. When you use this special cursor to select a control, the pop-up Help
window for that feature appears.

●

Click a feature or control, and then press the F1 key. The Help window for the currently selected
control appears.

Incompatible Print Settings messages
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in
response to specific print-driver selections. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or
impossible given the product capabilities or the current settings of other controls.
NOTE: Constraint messages are limited, and the underlying software architecture might accept some
settings that are illogical or impossible for the product to perform. Sending a job with incompatible
settings can lead to unexpected results. If print jobs do not print as expected, check the product
documentation for the product capabilities.
In supported Windows operating environments, some technically invalid print-driver configurations
result in warning messages. Duplexing, for example, is not possible when the Transparency paper type
is selected. The following figure shows an Incompatible Print Settings message.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Figure 4-1 An Incompatible Print Settings message

To resolve the conflicting settings, click Restore my previous settings., and then click OK. The
driver resets the conflicting control back to its previous state.
If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click Keep this setting, and I will change it later.,
and then click OK.
NOTE: In this example, the conflict can be resolved manually. If the conflict is not resolved when the
driver is closed, then the same dialog appears again when a print job is sent to the product.

ENWW

Help system

Advanced tab features
NOTE: The Advanced tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information about
how to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62,
Use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special
controls that are not commonly used, as well as to control features such as collating and copies in the
driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or
through the page settings in the software program). The following figure shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 4-2 The default appearance of the Advanced tab

The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
●

Paper/Output

●

Graphic

●

Document Options

Paper/Output
The Paper/Output setting contains the Copy Count setting.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Copy Count
Copy Count specifies the number of copies to print. This driver setting is useful for software programs
that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is available in the software program, set the copy
count in the software program.
The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number
by typing in the text box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. Valid entries
are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1
when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is
used. When you click another group box or leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the text box
(such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) are
changed to the last valid value that appeared in the text box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
between the software program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in
the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed.
It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, whenever possible.
When the Copy Count option is set to more than 1, the Collated check box becomes available.
Select this check box when you want the product to collate the printed copies. Most current software
programs support the collating feature in the print dialog box or through the page settings in the
software program.

Graphic
The Graphic setting contains the following controls:
●

Image Color Management settings

●

True Type Font settings

Image Color Management
This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.
ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before
printing so that the color of images on the screen more closely match the color of those images when
they are printed.
NOTE: The ICM control is typically set to ICM Disabled.

True Type Font
Use Substitute with Device Font (the default setting) to print documents that contain TrueType fonts
by using equivalent printer fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special
characters that the equivalent printer font does not support. Select Download as Softfont to
download TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.

ENWW

Advanced tab features

Document Options
The Document Options setting contains the following controls:
●

Advanced Printing Features

●

Print Optimizations

●

Printer Features

●

Layout Options

Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are
available, depending on your product.
Enhanced metafile spooling is used to greatly reduce the amount of time that elapses between a request
to print (initiated by an application) and the return of control to the application by the operating system.
For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If
compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some advanced printing features
might still appear in the print driver, even though they have been disabled. If you select an advanced
printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the Advanced tab, the feature is
automatically re-enabled.

Print Optimizations
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your
document contains overlapping text and graphics, the text that is placed on top of a graphic might not
print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When this feature is
disabled, print optimization-features, such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning
for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.

Printer Features
The Printer Features setting contains the following controls:
●

Print All Text as Black
The feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints all text as black
regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for white text,
which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark
background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text
that is part of a graphic.

●

Send True Type as Bitmap
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for software programs that have trouble
using TrueType fonts for special graphic aspects such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting
is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the product as
outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Raster Compression
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics-compression method:

●

◦

Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.

◦

Best Quality. This option forces the software to use a lossless compression method.
(Lossless means that no data is lost during compression.)

◦

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this option requires the software to always
use a lossy compression method (some data is lost).

Alternative Letterhead Mode
When selected, this option eliminates the need to flip or reload letterhead or preprinted paper in a
tray, whether you are printing on one or both sides of the sheet. Load the paper as you would for
printing on both sides. If the product tray has an icon that indicates whether to load paper either
face-up or face-down, load the paper in opposite orientation of that shown.
When this option is selected, you must use one of the following options in the Paper type
setting:
◦

Letterhead

◦

Preprinted

NOTE: Because Alternative Letterhead Mode is available only if the product is equipped
with an automatic duplexing unit, the HP LaserJet Pro CM1415 and HP LaserJet Pro CM1415fn
models do not support this option.

Layout Options
The Layout Options setting contains the Page Order setting.
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back
prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1
prints last.
NOTE: The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on individual logical
pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than one, the
ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of paper does not change.

ENWW

Advanced tab features

Paper/Quality tab features
NOTE: The Paper/Quality tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information
about how to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62,
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify paper size, type, and source. You can also use this tab to
specify different paper selections for the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover
of the document. The following figure shows the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 4-3 Paper/Quality tab

The Paper/Quality tab contains the following control sets:
●

Paper Options

●

Document preview image

●

Print Quality

Paper Options
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

The settings in the Paper Options group box are described in the following order:
●

Paper sizes

●

Custom Paper Size

●

Paper source

●

Paper type

●

Special pages

Paper sizes
The Paper sizes setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported paper sizes.
When you move the mouse over the dimensions label, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a
gloved hand. Click the dimensions label to toggle between English and metric units.
Because paper-size settings in most software programs override driver settings, it is generally best to
use the driver to set paper size only when you are printing from software programs that do not include
a paper-size setting, such as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not
require different paper sizes.
NOTE: Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different paper sizes
within a single document.
When you change the print-driver setting to a paper size that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the paper size or select another tray.
When the Settings under the Special Pages section have been changed, the Paper sizes, Paper
source, and Paper type menus change also, offering a variety of options. For more information, see
Special pages on page 74.

Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click Custom… on the Paper/Quality
tab. The following figure shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
NOTE: The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product supports custom paper sizes up to 14
inches in length. To use this paper size, set the custom paper size to match the custom paper size that
you are using, up to 14 inches in length.
Name
Use the Name text box to type a new name for a custom paper size. When you change the name to
something other than Custom, the Save and OK buttons become active.

ENWW

Paper/Quality tab features

The name that appears in the Name text box depends on the following conditions:
●

If a saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop-down menu on the Paper/Quality
tab, then the Name text box shows the name of the selected custom paper size.

●

If a standard paper size has been selected on the Paper/Quality tab, then the Name text box
shows the default name of Custom .

●

If a new name has been typed into the Name text box for the purpose of saving a new size or
renaming an existing size, then that new name will remain in the text box until the new size is
saved or the dialog box is closed.

If you type a new name into the Name text box, but then do not click Save, you can change the
width and height values without losing the name. However, if you close the dialog box without clicking
Save, any unsaved name or size values are lost without warning.
Paper size
The width and height values can be changed by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes in the
Paper Size group box.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to
the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry.
If units are in millimeters, the custom paper-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest
whole millimeter. The custom paper-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole
millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the minimum value. Width and height entries are
validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is 1 millimeter or 1/10 of an inch, depending on the current
measurement units.
Units
To change measurement units, click one of the options in the Units group box (either Inches or
Millimeters).
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum paper size for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product is 76 x 127 mm (3
x 5 in) and the maximum is 215.90 x 355.60 mm (8.50 x 14.00 in).

Paper source
The Paper source setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source
trays depends on the product accessories that are installed. Any optional source trays that are installed
through the Device Settings tab also appear here.
The Paper source drop-down menu can contain the following options, depending on what has been
installed on the product:

●

Automatically select

●

Printer Auto Select

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Manual Feed in Tray 1

●

Tray 1 (100-sheet multipurpose tray)

The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the HP LaserJet Pro
CM1410 Color MFP Series uses the source tray that supports the paper size that you have selected. If
you select a source tray other than Automatically select, make sure that the correct paper size is
loaded in the source tray.

Paper type
The Paper type drop-down menu shows the first few paper types that the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410
Color MFP Series supports and an entry for More. Clicking More opens the Type Is dialog box.
Click the + next to Type Is and its subcategories to view all of the paper types that the product
supports, listed in the following categories.
●

●

ENWW

Everyday <96g
◦

Unspecified

◦

Plain

◦

HP LaserJet 90g

◦

Light 60-74g

◦

Bond

◦

Recycled

Presentation 96-130g
◦

HP Color Laser Matte 105g

◦

HP Premium Choice Matte 120g

◦

Mid-Weight 96-110g

◦

Mid-Weight Glossy 96-110g

Brochure 131-175g
◦

HP Color Laser Brochure Matte 160g

◦

HP Superior Laser Matte 160g

◦

HP Color Laser Brochure Glossy 160g

◦

HP Tri-fold Color Laser Brochure 160g

◦

HP Superior Laser Glossy 160g

Photo/Cover 176-220g
◦

HP Cover Matte 200g

◦

HP Matte Photo 200g

Paper/Quality tab features

●

◦

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g

◦

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g (faster printing)

◦

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g (high gloss)

◦

Card Glossy 176-220g

Other
◦

Color Laser Transparency

◦

Labels

◦

Letterhead

◦

Envelope

◦

Heavy Envelope

◦

Preprinted

◦

Prepunched

◦

Colored

◦

Rough

◦

Heavy Rough

◦

HP Tough Paper

The default setting is Unspecified.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types through the driver. Use HP Web
Jetadmin to add custom paper types. Custom types can be added only by using bidirectional
communication, so they must already exist in the product when the bidirectional query occurs. If
bidirectional communication is enabled, then an updated list of paper types is returned. If bidirectional
communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom paper types that have been saved from
a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are
available through the driver.
NOTE: To download a current version of HP Web Jetamin and for the latest list of supported host
systems, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
If you select a setting other than the default, make sure that the correct paper type is loaded in the tray
that you selected in the Paper source setting.
When you change the print-driver setting to a paper type that is not currently loaded in the product, a
control-panel message appears that prompts you to load the paper type or select another tray.

Special pages
To specify special pages to be used, click the Settings button under Special Pages.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Covers
To use specific cover settings, click Covers in the Special Pages group box.
Use the Covers options to include a blank or preprinted cover on a document, or to include a front/
back cover from a source tray that is different from the one used for the remainder of the document.
The following are the Covers options:
●

Add a blank or preprinted cover: Select which cover is customized: Front, Back, or Both.

●

Paper source: The Paper source setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a front
and/or back cover to the document. The list of source trays depends on the accessories that are
installed. Any optional trays that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.

●

Paper type: The Paper type setting specifies the paper size to use for front and/or back
covers. Changes made to the Paper type setting here override any previous Paper type
settings using the same paper source.

NOTE: The same size of paper will be used for the entire print job.
When you change the type and source of the paper and covers, the settings remain configured until
you close the software program.
Print pages on different paper
Use the Print pages on different paper options to select an alternative paper type or source for
the first, last, or other pages of a document.
The following are the Print pages on different paper options:
●

Pages in document. Select which pages are customized: the First page, the Last page, or
specify a page range with the Pages option.

●

Paper source: The Paper source setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a
document. The list of source trays depends on the accessories that are installed. Any optional trays
that are installed through the Device Settings tab also appear here.

●

Paper type: The Paper type drop-down menu shows all of the paper types that the HP LaserJet
Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series supports.

NOTE: The same type of paper is used for the entire print job.
When you change the type and source of the paper and covers, the settings remain configured until
you close the software program.
Insert blank or preprinted pages
Use the Insert blank or preprinted pages options to designate where to insert preprinted pages
or blank pages into a document.

ENWW

Paper/Quality tab features

The following are the Insert blank or preprinted pages options:
●

Blank or preprinted sheet before page(s): Specify where in the document you want to
insert blank or preprinted pages by designating the page numbers or page ranges that the blank
or preprinted pages will precede. For example, to insert a blank or preprinted page on page four,
specify 5 in the Blank or preprinted sheet before page(s): option.

●

Paper type: The Paper type drop-down menu shows all of the paper types that the HP LaserJet
Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series supports.

Chapter separator pages
Use the Chapter separator pages options to designate where the first page of a chapter appears
in the document.
The following are the Chapter separator pages options:
●

Chapters begin on pages: Specify where in the document the chapters begin by designating
a page number for each chapter.

●

Start each chapter: Select Facing next page to make each chapter begin on the left side of
the document. Select Facing previous page to make each chapter begin on the right side of
the document.

Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the following Printing Preferences
driver tabs:
●

Printing Shortcuts

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an
arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking
the image.

Print Quality
The Print Quality group box contains the following controls:
●

Print Quality drop-down menu

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Print Quality drop-down menu
Use this control to select print quality. ImageREt settings precisely control colors by combining up to 4
colors and varying the amount of toner in a given area to create many smooth colors, sharp images,
and crisp text.
The Print Quality drop-down menu contains the following resolution options.

ENWW

●

ImageREt 3600. This setting is selected by default.

●

1200 x 1200. This setting may improve the rendering of fine lines and text.

Paper/Quality tab features

Effects tab features
NOTE: The Effects tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information about how
to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62,
Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following
figure shows the Effects tab.
Figure 4-4 Effects tab

The Effects tab contains the following controls:

●

Resizing Options

●

Document preview image

●

Watermarks

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Resizing Options
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
●

Actual Size (default)

●

Print Document On

●

Scale to Fit

●

% of Actual Size

Actual Size
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.

Print Document On
Click the Print Document On option to format the document for one paper size and then print the
document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
●

The % of Actual Size value is not 100.

●

The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the paper sizes on which you
can print. The list contains all of the standard paper sizes that the selected paper source supports and
any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected. Clear this check box if you do not want your document reduced or enlarged to
fit on the selected paper.

Scale to Fit
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target paper size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the
setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full
size on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document
image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper.
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to
the target paper size.

% of Actual Size
The % of Actual Size option provides a slider bar and input box to use for scaling the percentage
setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100% of actual size. Actual size is defined as the paper
size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the
software program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the
appropriate factor and sends it to the product.

ENWW

Effects tab features

The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider-bar indicator is
dragged, and the document preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the
arrows increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider-bar indicator. Instead, either use the sliderbar indicator to approximate the value that you want and then use the arrows to refine the value, or
type the value into the entry box.
The following settings disable % of Actual Size:
●

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected

●

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1

Printing Shortcuts

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

Watermarks
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create a new watermark (text only), or edit an
existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

●

(none)

●

[Username]

●

Confidential

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Draft

●

SAMPLE

The Watermarks feature can be configured using the Driver Configuration Utility.
If the [Username] watermark is selected, the driver will use the network username of the logged in
user for the watermark.
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the
system, plus the string "(none)," which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default
setting. Any watermark that is selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of
the document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is
"(none).”
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and
First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical
page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark
and then select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current,
unsaved changes can be canceled.

Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks
list and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you
type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the
Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit
box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, and then click Delete.
A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if
you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
NOTE: You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change
the Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.

ENWW

Effects tab features

Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current
Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you
might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font
size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for
example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name
is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).

Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations on
the page. All settings center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting
affects only the angle of the string placement. The following settings are available:
●

Diagonal. This is the default setting. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans
the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.

●

Horizontal. Select this setting to place the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right
edges of the page.

●

Custom. Select this setting to place the text at the specified angle across the page. Use the
numeric spin box to select the angle.

Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:
●

Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is
language-dependent.

●

Color
The Color drop-down menu contains the following selections:

●

◦

Gray

◦

Red

◦

Yellow

◦

Green

◦

Cyan

◦

Blue

◦

Magenta

Shading

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range
of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
◦

Lightest

◦

Very Light (default)

◦

Light

◦

Medium Light

◦

Medium

◦

Medium Dark

◦

Dark

◦

Very Dark

◦

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. Select Light to produce a lightly
saturated gray watermark. Select Lightest to produce the lightest shade of watermark. Select
Darkest to produce a black watermark.
●

Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is
language-dependent.

●

Style
The following settings are available:
◦

Regular

◦

Bold

◦

Italic

◦

Bold Italic
The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.

Default watermark settings
The following table shows Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks.
Table 4-1 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks

ENWW

Setting

New watermark

Preset watermark

Name

Arial

Varies by language

Color

Gray

Shading

Very Light

Effects tab features

Table 4-1 Font Attribute settings for new and preset watermarks (continued)
Setting

New watermark

Preset watermark

Size

Varies by language

Style

Regular

Click OK to accept all of the changes that have been made in the Watermark Details dialog box.
Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then
select a different watermark or click New, all of the changes are saved, and only the current, unsaved
changes can be canceled.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Finishing tab features
NOTE: The Finishing tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information about
how to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62.
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the paper output. The following figure shows the
Finishing tab.
Figure 4-5 Finishing tab

The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
●

Document Options

●

Document preview image

●

Orientation

Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls:
●

ENWW

Print on Both Sides

Finishing tab features

●

Flip Pages Up

●

Booklet Layout

●

Pages per Sheet

●

Print Page Borders

●

Page Order

Print on Both Sides
NOTE: This feature is called Print on Both Sides (manually) for the HP LaserJet Pro CM1415
and the HP LaserJet Pro CM1415fn, because these models do not include an automatic duplex unit. For
all other product models, this feature is called Print on Both Sides.
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is
available when the following conditions exist:
●

●

Paper type on the Paper tab is set to any paper type except for the following types:
◦

Labels

◦

Color Laser Transparency

Paper sizes is set to any paper size except for the following sizes:
◦

Envelope #10

◦

Double Postcard (JIS)

◦

Envelope #9

◦

Envelope Monarch

◦

Envelope B5

◦

Envelope C5

◦

Envelope C6

◦

Envelope DL

Print on both sides manually
Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box to print on the second side of the paper for
the HP LaserJet Pro CM1415 and HP LaserJet Pro CM1415fn product models, which do not have a
duplexing unit installed. Also, select Print on Both Sides (Manually) on the other HP LaserJet Pro
CM1410 Color MFP Series product models for paper types that are not available when using the
automatic duplexing unit, such as cardstock and thick paper.
Manually printing on the second side of a page is available when you are using the HP PCL 6 driver. If
a duplexing unit is installed and manual duplexing is enabled in the driver, the product automatically
prints on both sides of paper types that are supported for automatic duplexing (Letter, A4, Legal, and
8.5 x 11 only). For paper types that are not supported for automatic duplexing, a Help message

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

appears prompting you to configure the driver settings for manual printing on both sides. Manual
printing on both sides does not occur automatically.
Select the paper type that corresponds to the paper that you are using for the print job. The following
paper types have a different print modes when you manually print on the second side:
●

Plain

●

Preprinted

●

Letterhead

●

Prepunched

●

Bond

●

Recycled

●

Colored

●

Rough

NOTE: To make the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box available in the document
options, select the Allow Manual Duplexing option on the Device Settings tab in the print-driver
Properties tab set. See Installable Options on page 100.
If you want to print on both sides manually while using paper that is supported for automatic duplexing,
you must select and apply the Not Installed setting on the Allow manual duplexing option on
the Device Settings tab.
Cardstock paper can be manually printed on the second side, but no change occurs to the print mode.
Transparencies and labels should never be manually printed on the second side.
To print a multiple-page document, follow these steps:

ENWW

Select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box.

Click OK. The even-number pages of the document print.

When the control panel shows the Manually Feed message, insert the stack of paper (on which
the even-number pages have been printed) as indicated in the following figure.

Finishing tab features

Figure 4-6 Print on Both Sides Instructions dialog box

When you have completed the steps that appear in the dialog box, the second half of the print job
prints on the back side of the stack of paper. The driver does not require the program to specifically
support odd- and even-page printing, because the driver coordinates this function.

Flip Pages Up
Use the Flip Pages Up check box to specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages
Up check box is not available. It is available only when Print on Both Sides is selected. The
following table demonstrates the results of selecting this check box, depending on the paper orientation
selected on the Finishing tab.
Table 4-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)

Flip Pages Up selected

Flip Pages Up not selected

Portrait

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Landscape

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral
binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner
appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back
side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they
were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Booklet Layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down
menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the paper
size that is set on the Paper/Quality tab:
●

Left Binding

●

Right Binding

When you select Left Binding or Right Binding, the document preview image changes to show the
location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically
changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or
16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See Pages per Sheet on page 90 for more
information.
Book and Booklet Printing
The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages. It can have a different paper type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Covers and Print pages on
different paper settings on the Paper/Quality tab to select different paper for the front cover, first
page, other pages, and back cover. For more information, see Paper/Quality tab features on page 70.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can then be folded into a
booklet that is half the size of the paper. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing
tab to control booklet settings.
Print a booklet
1.

Open the driver Printing Preferences tab set and click the Printing Shortcuts tab. For
information about how to access the Printing Preferences tab set, see Printing Preferences
driver tabs on page 62.

Click to select Booklet Printing.
NOTE: Typically, you select the size of each page of the booklet in your software program by
clicking File, clicking Page, and then clicking Setup. If your software program does not allow
you to set the paper size, use the Paper sizes drop-down menu on the Printing Shortcuts tab.

ENWW

Select the appropriate settings from the following drop-down menus on the Printing Shortcuts
tab.
●

Paper type

●

Paper source

●

Orientation

●

Booklet Layout

Click OK to print.

Finishing tab features

Pages per Sheet
Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single
sheet of paper. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:
●

1 page per sheet (this is the default)

●

2 pages per sheet

●

4 pages per sheet

●

6 pages per sheet

●

9 pages per sheet

●

16 pages per sheet

NOTE: When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.
Related controls indented beneath Pages per Sheet are Print Page Borders and Page Order,
which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.

Print Page Borders
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define
the borders of each logical page.

Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
●

Right, then Down

●

Down, then Right

●

Left, then Down

●

Down, then Left

●

Printing Shortcuts

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Finishing

●

Color

Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the way that paper feeds
into the product. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are
portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
NOTE: Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page
orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
The Orientation group box contains the following options:
●

Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper.

●

Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper.

●

Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is
rotated 180°. This setting is useful for printing prepunched paper.

You can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by clicking the document preview image. If
you select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box, no change occurs in the document preview
image.

ENWW

Finishing tab features

Color tab features
NOTE: The Color tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information about how
to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62,
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and
halftoning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following
figure.
Figure 4-7 Color tab

The Color tab contains the following sets of controls:

●

Color Options

●

Color Themes

●

Document preview image

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print
job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
●

Automatic option (default)

●

Manual option

●

Settings button (Click this button to open the Color Settings dialog box.)

●

Print in Grayscale check box

Automatic
Use the Automatic option for color settings that automatically fine-tune the printed output. The
Automatic color settings provide high-quality output while maintaining product performance for most
color printing needs.

Manual
To change the color settings, select the Manual option, and then click Settings. The Color Settings
dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections by using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings
dialog box, and then click OK. The following figure shows the Color Settings dialog box with
"Custom" settings.
The Color Settings dialog box contains the following controls:
●

General
◦

●

Text
◦

●

Neutral Grays

Photographs
◦

ENWW

Neutral Grays

Graphics
◦

●

Edge Control

Neutral Grays

Color tab features

Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is
embedded in the product firmware. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text,
graphics, or photographs. The following options are available:
●

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner.
This option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default
setting for the Text and Graphics components.

●

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest
possible black. 4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.

Color Themes
The Color Themes group box contains the following RGB color options, which determines how
colors are rendered:
●

Default (sRGB)

●

Photo (sRGB)

●

Photo (Adobe RGB 1998)

●

Vivid (sRGB)

●

None

Default (sRGB)
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB color
as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).
Colors are matched to optimize the RGB colors on the screen and to provide vivid images and
graphics.

Photo (sRGB)
Select Photo (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap images, such
as .GIF or .eps files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching for rendering sRGB
bitmap images. This setting affects only raster data; it has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.
Using glossy paper in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.

Photo (Adobe RGB 1998)
Select Photo (AdobeRGB 1998) for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than
sRGB. For example, some digital cameras capture images in Adobe RBG, and documents that are
produced with Adobe PhotoShop use the Adobe RGB color space. When printing from a professional
software program that uses Adobe RGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the
software program and allow the product software to manage the color space.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Vivid (sRGB)
The Vivid (sRGB) feature instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less
colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.

None
Select None to instruct the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render documents
properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the program in which you are working
or in the operating system.
CAUTION: Use this option only if you are familiar with the procedures for managing color in the
software program or in the operating system.

Printing Shortcuts

●

Paper/Quality

●

Effects

●

Finishing

●

Color

ENWW

Color tab features

Services tab features
NOTE: The Services tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For information about
how to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62.
The Services tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-8 Services tab

The Services tab contains the following group boxes:

●

Internet Services

●

Device services

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Internet Services
The Internet Services group box contains the Select a destination drop-down menu with the
following selections:
●

Online diagnostic tools. This is the HP Instant Support Web site, where you can find
interactive tools and contacts for troubleshooting.

●

Support and troubleshooting. This is the main Web site for HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color
MFP Series product support.

●

Product manuals. View or download HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product
manuals.

●

Check for driver updates. Automatically check your print drivers to see whether the correct
and most up-to-date print drivers are installed.

●

Color printing access/usage. Find information about enabling and disabling color printing
and tracking color print-job usage.

●

Shop for supplies. Shop online for HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product
supplies.

If you have Internet access, select any of these items and click Go! to open the corresponding HP Web
page.

Device services
Click the Device and Supplies status icon to open the Device Status screen of the HP EWS, which
shows supply levels and control panel status.
Click the Print color usage job log icon to print a page that shows information about users, print
jobs, and applications that have printed to the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product.
Some enterprise customers want to disable the Services tab because it allows users to go to HP Web
sites. Use the HP Driver Preconfiguration Editor to disable the Services tab. The HP Driver
Preconfiguration Editor is available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/dcu

ENWW

Services tab features

Device Settings tab features
NOTE: The Device Settings tab is located on the Properties tab set. For information about how
to access these tabs, see Properties driver tabs on page 63,
Available options depend on the feature. The following figure shows the Device Settings tab.
Figure 4-9 Device Settings tab

The Device Settings tab contains controls for paper-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product.
The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
●

Form to Tray Assignment

●

Font Substitution Table

●

Installable Options

Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the paper size in each input
tray.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product supports more than one source of paper. You
can assign a form (which defines the paper size and margins) to each paper source. When a form is
matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The product prints from the tray to which
that form is assigned.
Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
paper size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are
available in the paper-size list on the Paper/Quality tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the product with paper-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional
accessory trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options
setting.
The input trays listed here are also listed as paper sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1.

Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.

Use the drop-down menu to select the paper size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.

Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click Cancel to reconfigure all the trays, and
remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper/Quality tab.

Font Substitution Table
Use the Font Substitution Table settings to change the TrueType to printer font mapping and to
install and remove external fonts for the product through the External Fonts option. External fonts can
be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the Font Substitution Table option to open a list of fonts, as show in the following figure. Use
the settings to change the TrueType-to-product font mappings.

External Fonts
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the product. External fonts can
be soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Click the External Fonts option to make the Properties button available. Click Properties to open
the HP Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following figure.

ENWW

Device Settings tab features

Installing external fonts
Follow these steps to install external fonts.
1.

Right-click the name of the product.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears.

Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or
click Browse to locate the file on the computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.

Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file
names appear in the Installed Font(s) window.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

Removing external fonts
1.

Right-click the name of the product.

Click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click Properties. The HP Font Installer dialog box appears. The external fonts that are
installed appear in the Installed Fonts window.

Select the fonts that you want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.

Click OK to close the HP Font Installer dialog box.

Installable Options
Items under Installable Options are automatically populated and their defaults set when the driver is
installed.

100

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

The HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series product has printing options that you can install and
configure in this section. The following controls are available:
●

Automatic Configuration

●

Allow Manual Duplexing

●

Job Separator

Automatic Configuration
Use the Device Settings tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the product. If
bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, update this tab by selecting the
Update Now setting in the Automatic Configuration setting. The default setting is Off. After an
automatic configuration, the setting returns to Off after the changes are made.
If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now setting is
unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
If you have more than one driver installed for the product (for example, the default HP PCL 6 Print
Driver and the HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver), the Update Now feature works automatically only on
the driver on which it is activated. The other driver will not be updated, and might show the default
setting for the specific product model.

Allow Manual Duplexing
Select Allow Manual Duplexing to print on both sides of any supported size and most types of
paper (except transparencies, envelopes, and labels). To use this feature, you must reinsert the paper
stack into the input tray to print the second side. The product pauses while you make this adjustment.
This setting is enabled by default.

Job Separator
Use this control to specify whether a print job identifier page should be printed between print jobs.

ENWW

Device Settings tab features

101

Printing Shortcuts tab features
●

Use defined printing shortcuts

●

Snapshot Photos

●

Labels

●

Labels

●

Create a custom printing shortcut

NOTE: The Printing Shortcuts tab is located on the Printing Preferences tab set. For
information about how to access these tabs, see Printing Preferences driver tabs on page 62,
Use the Printing Shortcuts tab to store specific combinations of driver settings for easy use.
The following figure shows the Printing Shortcuts tab.
Figure 4-10 Printing Shortcuts tab

The Printing Shortcuts tab is a new tab that appears on the HP PCL 6 Print Driver beginning with the
HP Color LaserJet CM4730 MFP. In previous drivers, the Print Task Quick Sets appeared in most of the
driver tabs, and was used to capture commonly used driver settings. Like Quick Sets, the Printing
Shortcuts tab saves commonly used driver settings under a shortcut name.
102

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Use defined printing shortcuts

●

Snapshot Photos

●

Labels

●

Labels

●

Create a custom printing shortcut

Use defined printing shortcuts
The Printing Shortcuts tab contains the following pre-defined shortcuts:
●

General Everyday Printing

●

Eco-print (Two-sided Printing)

●

Factory Defaults

●

Envelopes

●

Cardstock Heavy

●

Glossy/Presentation

General Everyday Printing
When General Everyday Printing is selected, the following controls are available:
●

Paper source:

●

Paper sizes:

●

Paper type:

●

Print on both sides:

When options other than the defaults are selected, the Save as... and Reset buttons become active.
Click Save as... to create a custom printing shortcut.
Click Reset to change customized settings back to the default settings.
Paper source
The following options are available:

ENWW

●

Automatically Select (default)

●

Printer auto select

●

Manual Feed in Tray 1

●

Tray 1

Printing Shortcuts tab features

103

Paper sizes
The following options are available:
●

A4/Letter (default)

●

Legal

●

Executive

●

8.5x13

●

4x6

●

5x8

●

RA4

●

SRA4

●

B5 (JIS)

●

10x15cm

●

16k 195x270mm

●

16k 184x260mm

●

16k 197x273mm

●

Japanese Postcard

●

Double Japan Postcard Rotated

●

Envelope #10

●

Envelope Monarch

●

Envelope B5

●

Envelope C5

●

Envelope DL

Paper type
The following options are available:

104

●

Unspecified (default)

●

Plain

●

HP LaserJet 90g

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

HP Color Laser Matte 105g

●

HP Premium Choice Matte 120g

●

HP Color Laser Brochure Matte 160g

●

HP Superior Laser Matte 160g

●

HP Cover Matte 200g

●

HP Matte Photo 200g

●

HP Tri-fold Color Laser Brochure 160g

●

HP Superior Laser Glossy 160g

●

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g

●

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g (faster printing)

●

HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g (higher gloss)

●

Light 60-74g

●

Mid-Weight 96-110g

●

Mid-Weight Glossy 96-110g

●

Card Glossy 176-220g

●

Color Laser Transparency

●

Labels

●

Letterhead

●

Envelope

●

Heavy Envelope

●

Preprinted

●

Prepunched

●

Colored

●

Bond

●

Recycled

●

Rough

●

Heavy Rough

●

HP Tough Paper

Printing Shortcuts tab features

105

Print on both sides
NOTE: Because the HP LaserJet Pro CM1415 and HP LaserJet Pro CM1415fn models do not include
a duplexing unit, the Print on both sides option is available, but duplexing is a manual process.
The following options are available:
●

No (default)

●

Yes, Flip Over

●

Yes, Flip Up

Eco-print (Two-sided Printing)
●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Letter

●

Paper type: Unspecified

●

Print on both sides: Yes, flip over

Factory Defaults
When Factory Defaults is selected, the customizable options are grayed out, locking in those default
options.
The Factory Defaults are as follows:
●

Paper source: Automatically select

●

Paper sizes: Letter (This setting changes according to country/region.)

●

Paper type: Unspecified

●

Print on both sides: No

●

Color Options: Color

Envelopes
●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Envelope #10

●

Paper type: Envelope

Cardstock Heavy

106

●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Letter (This setting changes according to country/region.)

●

Paper type: HP Cover Matte 200g

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

●

Print on both sides:No

●

Color options: Color

Glossy/Presentation
●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Letter (This setting changes according to country/region.)

●

Paper type: Unspecified

●

Print on both sides: No

●

Color theme: Default (sRGB)

Snapshot Photos
●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: 4x6

●

Paper type: HP Color Laser Photo Glossy 220g (faster printing)

●

Color theme: Photo

Labels
●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Letter

●

Paper type: Labels (this option is grayed out so it cannot be changed)

●

Color options: Color

●

Paper source: Automatically Select

●

Paper sizes: Letter

●

Paper type: Transparency (this option is grayed out so it cannot be changed)

●

Color options: Color

Labels

Create a custom printing shortcut

ENWW

Select General Everyday Printing as a base.

Select the appropriate print settings on the Printing Shortcuts tab or use the settings on any of
the Printing Preferences tabs.

Printing Shortcuts tab features

107

108

On the Printing Shortcuts tab, click Save As.... The Printing Shortcuts dialog box
appears.

Type a name for the custom printing shortcut, and then click OK. The custom printing shortcut
appears in the Printing Shortcuts list.

To delete a custom printing shortcut, click the custom shortcut, then click the Delete button.

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

About tab features
NOTE: The About tab is located on the Properties tab set. For information about how to access
these tabs, see Properties driver tabs on page 63.
The About tab provides detailed information about driver component versions. It contains an overall
build version number (in parentheses after the model name) together with specific information about
each of the components. The information varies according to the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP
Series model number, driver, date, and versions. The About tab is shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-11 About tab

The About tab lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also
indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date
the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is autoconfigured or user-configured.
The About button is also available on most driver screens. The About button provides a driver version
number and creation date.

ENWW

About tab features

109

110

Chapter 4 HP PCL 6 print driver and HP PS Universal Print Driver for Windows

ENWW

Macintosh software and utilities

●

Supported operating systems for Macintosh

●

Macintosh system requirements

●

Macintosh printing-system software

●

Macintosh install and uninstall instructions

111

Supported operating systems for Macintosh
The product supports the following Macintosh operating systems:
●

Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6

NOTE: PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.

Macintosh system requirements
Hardware requirements
●

256 MB RAM

●

150 MB HD free space

●

CD-ROM

●

Hi-Speed USB 2.0

Macintosh printing-system software
The printing-system software for Macintosh is composed of an HP-created postscript (PS) printer
definition file (PPD) and a Printer Dialog Extension (PDE) file that work together with the Macintosh OS
printing system. These files are used by the Macintosh OS printing system to determine default printerdriver settings and to allow the user to select between the various print options and settings. An HPsupplied Macintosh printer configuration utility is provided, which allows the user to access the
HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS) for additional configuration and product status monitoring. The
following are provided on the printing-system CD:
●

The HP LaserJet Installer for Macintosh

The following components are installed by the HP LaserJet Installer for Macintosh:
●

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PPD

●

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PDE

●

HP USB EWS Gateway

●

HP LaserJet Utility

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PPD
A postscript printer description (PPD) file is a text file that contains keywords and other information to
specify printer features, options, and settings. PPD files are created by printer vendors for a specific
postscript printer or printer family. PPD files are created by printer vendors to describe the set of printer
features available for their postscript printers. On the Macintosh, PPD files provide all the information
necessary to describe a postscript printer’s features, including options and default settings. They also
contain the postscript code used to invoke those features.

112

Chapter 5 Macintosh software and utilities

ENWW

HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series PDE
A Print Dialog extension file can specify one or more PDEs to load in the Print dialog box to provide
HP printer specific features. A printing dialog extension (PDE) is a way to extend the Print dialog box in
Mac OS X with custom printer features.
A PPD file and printing dialog extension (PDE) for a printer are bound to a printer queue when the
queue is created.

HP USB EWS Gateway
For network connected printers, the EWS can be accessed directly by typing the network IP address or
DNS name of the product into the Web browser. HP USB EWS Gateway software, which is
automatically installed, allows a Web browser to access the product’s EWS if the product is connected
using a USB cable. Click the Utility button when using a USB connection to access the EWS though
the Web browser.

HP LaserJet Utility
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to configure, administer, and set up product features that are not available
from the printer driver. You can use the HP LaserJet Utility with HP printers connected via USB, and
ethernet.

Supported printer drivers for Macintosh
The HP installer provides Postscript Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs), and
the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple postscript printer drivers, provide access to device features.
Use the Apple postscript printer driver that comes with the computer.

Priority for print settings for Macintosh
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.

ENWW

●

Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override
settings changed anywhere else.

●

Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the
program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box
have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.

●

Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used
in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties
dialog boxes.

●

Printer control-panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower
priority than changes made anywhere else.

Macintosh printing-system software

113

Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh
Change the settings for all print
jobs until the software program
is closed

Change the default settings for
all print jobs

Change the product configuration
settings

On the File menu, click Print.

Change the settings that you want
on the various menus.

From the Apple menu, click
System Preferences and then
Print & Fax.

On the Presets menu, click Save
as and type a name for the preset.

Click Options & Supplies.

Click the Driver menu.

Select the driver from the list, and
configure the installed options.

These settings are saved in the Presets
menu. To use the new settings, you must
select the saved preset option every time
you open a program and print.

Software for Macintosh computers
HP LaserJet Utility
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.
You can use the HP LaserJet Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.
Open the HP LaserJet Utility
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6
1.

In System Preferences, click the Printer & Fax icon.

Select the printer and then click the Open Print Queue... button.

Click the Utility icon.

Embedded Web Server
The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web Server (HP EWS), which provides access to
information about device and network activities. For a complete explanation of the features and
functionality of the HP EWS, see the product user guide, which is available on the printing-system
software CD.

Availability
This STR provides information about the availability of the printing-system software and related software
and firmware. Printing-system software on a CD is available from HP fulfillment centers.

114

●

Printing-system software on the Web

●

In-box printing-system software CD

Chapter 5 Macintosh software and utilities

ENWW

Printing-system software on the Web
All software that is contained on the installation CDs is also available on the Web.
Web deployment is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The HP Web site offers an
option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
NOTE: This STR describes drivers that are shipped on the printing-system software CD that comes
with the product. This STR does not describe drivers that will become available on the Web.
The printing-system software is available for download at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/CM1410series

In-box printing-system software CD
One CD is included in-box with the product. The printing-system software CD contains the following
components:
●

Software installer

●

Links to the HP Universal Print Drivers on the Web

●

User guides

●

Support information

The CD is divided into two partitions, one for each of the following operating systems:
●

Windows

●

Macintosh

The files in each partition of the printing-system software CD include documentation files and files that
are required to install and uninstall the printing-system software components. Use the printing-system
software CD to install the printing-system software.
●

Macintosh disk

Macintosh disk
The HP Macintosh printing-system software files reside on the Macintosh disk. The HP LaserJet Installer
for Macintosh is at the root of the Macintosh CD. The user manuals (.PDF) are grouped by language
and are in the Documentation directory on the Macintosh partition of the software CDs.

ENWW

Macintosh printing-system software

115

Macintosh install and uninstall instructions
●

Install the Macintosh printing-system software

●

Remove the printing-system software from Macintosh operating systems

Install the Macintosh printing-system software
On a Macintosh computer, the printing-system software installation procedures are the same for a
network administrator, a network client, or a single user. Install the printing-system software on any
computer that has access rights to the product. The computer user must also have administrative rights
on the computer to install the printing-system software.
●

General installation for Macintosh operating systems

●

Setup instructions

General installation for Macintosh operating systems
1.

If you are connecting the product to a network, connect the network cable to the network port. If
you are connecting the product to a computer by using the USB cable, connect the USB cable.

Insert the Macintosh printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE: If the HP LaserJet installer browser screen does not open automatically when the CD is
inserted into the CD-ROM drive, double-click the product CD image on the desktop to open the
installer browser screen.

In the HP LaserJet installer browser screen, double-click the product .dmg icon, then double-click
the .pkg icon. This begins the printing-system installation.
NOTE: In the HP LaserJet installer browser screen, double-click the Documentation icon to
gain access to the manuals. Select a language folder and locate the available guides which are
in .PDF format. The user guide is a .PDF file that is named LJCM1130–M1210_use_xxww.pdf,
where “xx” is a language abbreviation

The Introduction screen appears. Click Continue and then follow the onscreen instructions to
complete the printing-system software installation.
NOTE: When the printing-system software is installing, be patient. The installer must perform an
initial search of the computer, which can take up to 1 minute. During this time, the installer might
appear to be stalled.

When the printing-system software installation is complete, click Close.

Continue with the steps for setting up a product.

Setup instructions
This section contains information about the following topics:

116

●

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6

●

Troubleshooting the product setup

Chapter 5 Macintosh software and utilities

ENWW

Setting up a printer with Mac OS X v10.5 and v10.6
Complete these steps after completing the printing-system software installation.
1.

If you are installing the product using a USB connection, verify the USB cable is connected
between the product and the computer. Turn on the product. If you are installing using a network
connection, verify that the network cable is connected to the product and that the product is on.

In the Applications folder (in the Finder utility), open the System Preferences folder, and
then open Printer & Fax.

If you are installing the product using a USB connection, verify that the product appears in the
printer list. The Name column in the printer list should display the product name. If this is the
case, the USB setup is complete.
If the product does not appear, or if the correct information does not appear in the field, see
Troubleshooting the product setup on page 117.
If you are installing the product using a network connection, continue with the following steps.

Click the add + icon beneath the Printer List to open the Printer Browser screen.

Select your product model from the list of printers with Bonjour as the Kind. Click the Add button.

Troubleshooting the product setup
If the product does not appear in the printer list after an installation:
Complete each one of these solutions in the order given, and restart the setup process after each one to
see if the issue has been resolved.
●

Verify that the USB or network cable is connected between the product and the computer and that
the product is powered on.

●

Try disconnecting and reconnecting the cable. If the computer has more than one USB port, try a
different USB port.

●

Turn the product off and then back on.

●

Turn the computer off and then back on.

●

If you are using a USB hub on the computer, disconnect any other USB devices from the hub.

●

Try forcing the product into USB Full Speed mode by using the control panel.

If the wrong PPD appears in the Kind column in the printer list after installation:

ENWW

Unplug the USB cable.

Delete the print queue with the incorrect type (for example, Generic PostScript Printer).

Reinstall the printing-system software.

Turn the computer off and then on.

Reconnect the USB cable from the computer to the product.

Macintosh install and uninstall instructions

117

If these steps do not resolve the problem, delete the incorrect print queue, click Add, choose the
product from the list, and then browse manually for the product PPD.

Remove the printing-system software from Macintosh operating
systems

118

Open Finder.

Navigate to Applications/HP Laserjet Professional CM1410 MFP Series.

Double-click HP Uninstaller.app. The uninstaller will run and remove the software.

Chapter 5 Macintosh software and utilities

ENWW

Solve problems

●

Problem-solving checklist

●

Troubleshooting process

●

Tools for troubleshooting

●

Menu map

●

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

●

Improve print quality

●

Clean the product

●

The product does not print or it prints slowly

●

Solve walk-up USB printing problems

●

Solve connectivity problems

●

Solve wireless network problems

●

Service mode functions

●

Solve fax problems

●

Product updates

119

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.
●

Step 1: Check that the product power is on

●

Step 2: Check the environment where the product is installed

●

Step 3: Check the control panel for error messages

●

Step 4: Test print functionality

●

Step 5: Test copy functionality

●

Step 6: Test the fax sending functionality

●

Step 7: Test the fax receiving functionality

●

Step 8: Try sending a print job from a computer

●

Step 9: Test the walk-up USB printing functionality

Step 1: Check that the product power is on
1.

Make sure the product is plugged in and turned on.

Make sure the power cable is connected to the product and the outlet.

Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

If the product motors do not rotate, make sure the print cartridges are installed and that the doors
are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

If the document feeder motor does not rotate, open the document feeder cover and remove any
packing material or shipping tape.

If the scanner bulb does not light during copying, scanning, or faxing, contact HP support.

Step 2: Check the environment where the product is installed
●

Is the product installed on a solid, level surface (± 1°)?

●

Is the operating environment within the specified parameters?

●

Is the product exposed to direct sunlight?

Step 3: Check the control panel for error messages
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
Common problems that result in control-panel error messages include the following:

120

●

Paper incorrectly installed in the tray

●

Paper guides not aligned with the paper stack in the tray

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Step 4: Test print functionality
1.

From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.

If the report does not print, make sure paper is loaded in the tray, and check to control panel to
see if paper is jammed inside the product.

button.

NOTE: Make sure the paper in the tray meets specifications for this product.

Step 5: Test copy functionality
1.

Place the configuration page into the document feeder and make a copy. If paper does not feed
smoothly through the document feeder, you might need to clean the document feeder rollers and
separation pad. Make sure the paper meets specifications for this product.

Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.

Step 6: Test the fax sending functionality
1.

From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu, and then open the Fax Service menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button to
test the fax functionality.

Touch the Fax button on the product control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

button.

Step 7: Test the fax receiving functionality
1.

From the control panel Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu, and then open the Fax Service menu. Touch the Run Fax Test button to
test the fax functionality.

Use another fax machine to send a fax to the product.

If the product does not receive the fax, make sure that you do not have too many telephone
devices connected to the product, and that all telephone devices are connected in the correct
order.

Review and reset the product fax settings.

Turn off the Private Receive feature.

button.

Step 8: Try sending a print job from a computer

ENWW

Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the product.

If the job does not print, make sure you selected the correct printer driver.

Uninstall and then reinstall the product software.

Problem-solving checklist

121

Step 9: Test the walk-up USB printing functionality
1.

Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the slot on the front
of the product.

On the control panel, touch the USB Flash Drive button, and try printing the document or photo.

If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Troubleshooting process
Power subsystem
Power-on checks
Turn on the power. If the control-panel LEDs do not illuminate, perform the power-on checks to find the
cause of the problem.

122

Verify that the product is plugged into an active electrical outlet that delivers the correct voltage.

Verify that the power switch is in the on position.

Make sure that the product makes the expected start-up sounds.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting
Component diagnostics
LED diagnostics
Network LEDs
The onboard network solution has two network port LEDs. When the product is connected to a properly
working network through a network cable, the yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED
indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link
has failed.
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually
configure the link settings on the onboard network solution by using the product control-panel menus.
1.

Touch the Setup

Scroll to and touch the Network Setup menu.

Touch the Link Speed menu.

Select one of the following options.

button.

Setting

Description

Automatic

The print server automatically configures itself for the highest link speed and
communication mode allowed on the network.

10T Half

10 megabytes per second (Mbps), half-duplex operation

10T Full

10 Mbps, full-duplex operation

100TX Half

100 Mbps, half-duplex operation

100TX Full

100 Mbps, full-duplex operation

Touch the OK button. The product turns off and then on.

Control panel LEDs
The state of the Ready light and Attention light on the product signal the product status. The following
table outlines the possible control-panel light states.
NOTE: Wireless models have a blue LED that illuminates when the product wireless function is
enabled and available.

ENWW

Product state

Ready light state

Attention light state

Initializing

Blinking

Ready

Off

Receiving data/processing job or
cancelling job

Blinking

Off

Tools for troubleshooting

123

Product state

Ready light state

Attention light state

Error message

Off

Blinking

Fatal error (49 or 79 error)1

The product restarts after one of these errors occurs.

Control-panel diagnostics
The product includes diagnostic tests for the control panel.
Test the control-panel display
1.

Touch the Setup

Touch the left arrow button

Touch the Setup

Open the 2ndary Service menu.

Open the Display test menu.

button.
, and then quickly touch the Cancel

button.

button to return to the main menus.

Test the control-panel buttons
1.

Touch the Setup

Touch the left arrow button

Touch the Setup

Open the 2ndary Service menu.

Open the Button test menu.

button.
, and then quickly touch the Cancel

button.

button to return to the main menus.

Engine Diagnostics
Engine test

124

With the product off, open the front and rear doors.

Turn the power on, and close both doors within ten seconds.

An engine test page (a page containing multiple horizontal colored lines) will print.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Use the HP ToolboxFX software
HP ToolboxFX is a program that you can use to complete the following tasks:
●

Check the product status.

●

Configure the product settings.

●

View troubleshooting information.

You can view HP ToolboxFX when the product is directly connected to your computer or is connected to
the network. You must perform a recommended software installation to use HP ToolboxFX.
NOTE: HP ToolboxFX is not supported for Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, Windows XP
(64-bit), or Macintosh operating systems. To use HP ToolboxFX, you must have TCP/IP protocol installed
on your computer.
You do not have to have Internet access to open and use HP ToolboxFX.

View the HP ToolboxFX
Open HP ToolboxFX in one of these ways:
).

●

In the Windows system tray, double-click the HP ToolboxFX icon (

●

On the Windows Start menu, click Programs (or All Programs in Windows XP and Vista),
click HP, click the name of this product, and then click HP ToolboxFX.

Status
The Status folder contains links to the following main pages:
●

Device status. This page indicates product conditions such as a jam or an empty tray. After you
correct a problem, click Refresh status to update the product status.

●

Supplies status. View details such as the estimated percent of life remaining in the print
cartridge and the number of pages that have been printed with the current print cartridge. This
page also has links for ordering supplies and for finding recycling information.

●

Device configuration. View a detailed description of the current product configuration,
including the amount of memory installed and whether optional trays are installed.

●

Network summary. View a detailed description of the current network configuration, including
the IP address and network status.

●

Reports. Print the Configuration report and other information pages.

●

Color usage job log. View color usage information for the product.

●

Event log. View a history of product errors.
The event log is a table where the product events are logged for your reference. The log contains
codes that correspond to the error messages that appear on the product control panel display. The
number in the Page Count column specifies the total number of pages that the product had printed
when the error occurred. The most recent error is listed first.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

125

Fax
Use the HP ToolboxFX Fax tab to perform fax tasks from your computer. The Fax tab contains links to
the following main pages:
●

Fax Receive. Set the fax receive mode.

●

Fax Phone Book. Add, edit, or delete entries in the product phone book.

●

Fax Send Log. View all of the recent faxes that have been sent from the product.

●

Fax Receive Log. View all of the recent faxes that have been received by the product.

●

Block Faxes. Add, delete, or view fax numbers that are blocked.

Fax Receive
The following options are available when receiving a fax:
●

Print the fax. You can also select an option to have a message appear on your computer to
notifying you when the fax was printed.

●

Forward the fax to another fax machine.

NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.
Fax phone book
Use the HP ToolboxFX fax phone book to add and remove individuals or groups on your speed-dial list,
import phone books from a variety of sources, and update and maintain the contact list.
●

To add an individual contact to the speed-dial list, select the row of the speed dial number that
you want to specify. Type the contact name in the Contact name window. Type the fax number
in the Fax number window. Click Add.

●

To add a group of contacts to the speed-dial list, select the row of the speed-dial number that you
want to specify. Click Add Group. Double-click a contact name from the list on the left to move it
to the group list on the right, or select a name on the left and then click the appropriate arrow to
move it to the group list on the right. You can also use those two methods to move names from
right to left. When you have created a group, type a name in the Group name window, and
then click OK.

●

To edit an existing individual speed-dial entry, click anywhere on the row containing the contact
name to select it, and then click Update. Type changes in the appropriate windows, and then
click OK.

●

To edit an existing group-speed-dial entry, click anywhere on the row containing the group name
to select it, and then click Update Group. Make any required changes, and then click OK.

●

To delete an entry from the speed-dial list, select the item, and then click Delete.

●

To move speed dial entries, select the entry and then click Move, or select Move and then
specify the entry in the dialog box. Either select Next empty row or specify the number of the
row where you want to move the entry.
NOTE: If you specify a row that is occupied, the new entry will overwrite the existing entry.

126

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

●

To import contacts from a phone book that exists in Lotus Notes, Outlook, or Outlook Express,
click Import/Export Phone Book. Select the Import option, and then click Next. Select the
appropriate software program, navigate to the appropriate file, and then click Finish. To export
contacts from a phone book, click Import/Export Phone Book. Select the Export option,
and then click Next. Enter the file name or browse to the file to which you want to export
contacts, and then click Finish. You can also select individual entries from the phone book
instead of importing the entire phone book.

●

To delete all entries, click Delete All, and then click Yes.

In addition to numerical digits, the following are valid characters for fax numbers:
●

(

●

)

●

NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

127

Fax send log
The HP ToolboxFX fax send log lists all recently sent faxes and information about them, including the
date and time sent, job number, fax number, page count, and the results.
Click any column heading in the fax send log to re-sort the information in that column in ascending or
descending order.
The Results column provides the fax status. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column provides a
description of why the fax was not sent.
Fax receive log
The HP ToolboxFX fax receive log provides a list of all recently received faxes and information about
them including the date and time received, job number, fax number, page count, results, and an
abbreviated fax image.
The fax receive log can be used to block future faxes. Check the Block Fax box next to a received fax
listed on the log.
Click on any column heading in the fax receive log to re-sort the information in that column in
ascending or descending order.
The Results column provides the fax status. If the fax attempt was unsuccessful, this column provides a
description of why the fax was not received.
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.
Block Faxes
Block Faxes provides a list of all numbers that are blocked. Add, modify, or delete blocked fax
numbers on this tab.

Help
The Help folder contains links to the following main pages:
●

128

Color Printing Tools. Open Microsoft Office Basic Colors or the full palette of color with
associated RGB values. Use the HP Basic Color Match to adjust spot colors in your printed output.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

System Settings
The HP ToolboxFX System Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:
●

Device Information. View information about the product, such as the product description and a
contact person.

●

Paper Setup. Change the product paper-handling settings, such as default paper size and
default paper type.

●

Print Quality. Change the product print-quality settings.

●

Print Density. Change the print-density settings, such as contrast, highlights, midtones, and
shadows.

●

Paper Types. Change the mode settings for each media type, such as letterhead, prepunched,
or glossy paper.

●

System Setup. Change the system settings, such as jam recovery and auto-continue. Change the
Cartridge low threshold setting, which sets the toner level that causes a Low toner pop-up
alert.

●

Device Polling. Change the product polling settings, which determine how often HP ToolboxFX
collects data from the product.

●

Save/Restore Settings. Save the current settings for the product to a file on the computer. Use
this file to load the same settings onto another product or to restore these settings to this product at
a later time.

●

Product Security. Set, change, or clear the product security password.

Device Information
The Device Information page stores data about your product for future reference. The information that
you type in the fields on this page appears on the Configuration page. You can type any character in
each of these fields.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

129

Paper Setup
Use these options to configure your default settings.
The following options are available for handling print jobs when the product is out of paper:
●

Select Wait for paper to be loaded.

●

Select Cancel from the Paper out action drop-down list to cancel the print job.

The Paper out time field specifies how long the product waits before acting on your selections. You
can specify from 0 to 3600 seconds.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.
Print Quality
Use these options to improve the appearance of your print jobs.
Color Calibration
Power On Calibration. Specify whether the product should calibrate when you turn it on.
●
●

Calibration Timing. Specify how frequently the product should calibrate.

●

Calibrate Now. Set the product to calibrate immediately.

NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.
Print Density
Use these settings to make fine adjustments in the amount of each color of toner that is used for your
printed documents.
●

Contrasts. Contrast is the range of difference between light (highlight) and dark (shadow) colors.
To increase the overall range between light and dark colors, increase the Contrasts setting.

●

Highlights. Highlights are colors that are nearly white. To darken highlight colors, increase the
Highlights setting. This adjustment does not affect midtone or shadow colors.

●

Midtones. Midtones are colors that are halfway between white and solid density. To darken
midtone colors, increase the Midtones setting. This adjustment does not affect highlight or
shadow colors.

●

Shadows. Shadows are colors that are nearly solid density. To darken shadow colors, increase
the Shadows setting. This adjustment does not affect highlight or midtone colors.

Paper Types
Use these options to configure print modes that correspond to the various media types. To reset all
modes to factory default settings, select Restore modes.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.

130

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

System setup
Use the HP ToolboxFX system settings options to configure global settings for copy, fax, scan, and print,
such as jam recovery and auto-continue.
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.
Device polling
You can turn off HP ToolboxFX device polling to reduce network traffic.
NOTE: You must click Apply before the changes take effect.

Print Settings
The HP ToolboxFX Print Settings tab contains links to the following main pages:
●

Printing. Change the default product print settings, such as number of copies and paper
orientation.

●

PCL5. View and change the PCL5 settings.

●

PostScript. View and change the PS settings.

Printing
Use these options to configure the settings for all print functions. These are the same options that are
available on the control panel.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.
PCL5
Use these options to configure the settings when you are using the PCL print personality.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.
PostScript
Use this option when you are using the PostScript print personality. When the Print PostScript error
option is turned on, the PostScript error page automatically prints when PostScript errors occur.
NOTE: You must click Apply before your changes take effect.

Network Settings
The network administrator can use this tab to control the network-related settings for the product when it
is connected to an IP-based network.
NOTE: You cannot configure wireless network settings by using the HP ToolboxFX software.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

131

Internal print-quality test pages
Configuration page
The configuration page lists current product settings and properties. This page also contains a status log
report.

132

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Reports button.

Touch the Configuration Report button.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

button.

ENWW

Print-quality troubleshooting tools
Calibrate the product to align the colors
If the printed output has colored shadows, blurry graphics, or areas that have poor color, you might
need to calibrate the product to align the colors. Print the Diagnostics Page from the Reports menu on
the control panel to check the color alignment. If the blocks of color on that page are not aligned with
each other, you need to calibrate the product.
1.

On the product control panel, open the System Setup menu.

Open the Print Quality menu, and select the Color Calibration item.

Select the Calibrate Now option.

Control panel menus
Setup Menu
To open this menu, touch the Setup

ENWW

●

Reports

●

Quick Forms

●

Fax Setup

●

System Setup

●

Service

●

Network Setup

button. The following sub menus are available:

Tools for troubleshooting

133

Reports menu
Menu item

Description

Demo Page

Prints a page that demonstrates print quality

Menu Structure

Prints a control-panel menu layout map.

Configuration Report

Prints a list of the product settings

Supplies Status

Prints the print-cartridge status. Includes the following information:

Network Summary

●

Estimated percentage of cartridge life remaining

●

Approximate pages remaining

●

Part numbers for HP print cartridges

●

Number of pages printed

●

Information about ordering new HP print cartridges and recycling used HP print
cartridges

Displays status for:
●

Network hardware configuration

●

Enabled features

●

TCP/IP and SNMP information

●

Network statistics

●

Wireless network configuration (wireless models only)

Usage Page

Displays the number of pages printed, faxed, copied, and scanned by the product

PCL Font List

Prints a list of all installed PCL 5 fonts

PS Font List

Prints a list of all installed PS fonts

PCL6 Font List

Prints a list of all installed PCL 6 fonts

Color Usage Log

Prints information about the color supply usage

Service Page

Prints the service page
The service page includes information about supported paper types, copy settings, and other
settings that are not included on the configuration page.

134

Diagnostics Page

Prints diagnostic information about calibration and color quality

Print Quality Page

Prints a page that helps solve problems with print quality

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Quick Forms menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Notebook Paper

Narrow Rule

Prints pages that have preprinted lines

Wide Rule
Child Rule
Graph Paper

1/8 inch

Prints pages that have preprinted graph lines

5 mm
Checklist

1-Column

Prints pages that have preprinted lines with check boxes

2-Column
Music Paper

Portrait

Prints pages that have preprinted lines for writing music

Landscape

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

135

Fax Setup menu
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Fax Set-Up Utility

Basic Setup

This is a tool for configuring the fax settings. Follow the onscreen prompts and select the appropriate response for
each question.
Time/Date

(Settings for time
format, current
time, date format,
and current date.)

Sets the time and date setting for the product.

Fax Header

Enter your fax
number.

Sets the identifying information that is sent to the receiving
product.

Enter company
name.

Identifies the fax sender (optional)

Automatic*

Sets the type of answer mode. The following options are
available:

Answer Mode

Manual
TAM
Fax/Tel

Rings to Answer

136

Description

Chapter 6 Solve problems

●

Automatic: The product automatically answers an
incoming call on the configured number of rings.

●

Manual: The user must press the Start Fax button or
use an extension phone to make the product answer
the incoming call.

●

TAM: A telephone answering machine (TAM) is
attached to the Auxilary phone port of the product.
The product will not pick up any incoming call, but
only listen for fax tones after the answering machine
has picked up the call.

●

Fax/Tel: The product must automatically pick up the
call and determine if the call is a voice or fax call. If
the call is a fax call, the product handles the call as
usual. If the call is a voice call, an audible synthesized
ring is generated to alert the user of an incoming voice
call.

Sets the number of rings that must occur before the fax
modem answers. The default setting is 5.

ENWW

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Distinctive Ring

All Rings*

If you have distinctive ring phone service, use this item to
configure how the product responds to incoming calls.

Single
Double
Triple

●

All Rings: The product answers any calls that come
through the telephone line.

●

Single: The product answers any calls that produce a
single-ring pattern.

●

Double: The product answers any calls that produce a
double-ring pattern.

●

Triple: The product answers any calls that produce a
triple-ring pattern.

●

Double and Triple: The product answers any calls that
produce a double-ring or triple-ring pattern.

Double and Triple

Dial Prefix

On
Off*

Advanced Setup

Fax Resolution

Standard
Fine*
Superfine

Specifies a prefix number that must be dialed when sending
faxes from the product. If you turn this feature on, the
product prompts you to enter the number and then it
automatically includes that number every time you send a
fax.
Sets the resolution for sent documents. Higher resolution
images have more dots per inch (dpi), so they show more
detail. Lower resolution images have fewer dots per inch
and show less detail, but the file size is smaller and the fax
takes less time to transmit.

Photo
Lighter/Darker
Fit to Page

Sets the darkness of outgoing faxes.
On*
Off

Glass Size

Letter
A4

Shrinks incoming faxes that are larger than the paper size
set for the tray.
Sets the default paper size for documents being scanned
from the flatbed scanner.
NOTE: The default setting is determined by the choice of
location during the initial product setup.

Dialing Mode

Tone*

Sets whether the product should use tone or pulse dialing.

Pulse
Redial if Busy

On*
Off

Redial if No Answer

On
Off*

Redial if Comm.
Error

ENWW

On*
Off

Sets whether the product should attempt to redial if the line
is busy.
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial if the
recipient fax number does not answer.
Sets whether the product should attempt to redial the
recipient fax number if a communication error occurs.

Tools for troubleshooting

137

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Detect Dial Tone

Sets whether the product should check for a dial tone
before sending a fax.

Off*
Billing Codes

On
Off*

Extension Phone

On*
Off

Stamp Faxes

On
Off*

Private Receive

On
Off*

Confirm Fax
Number

Allow Fax Reprint

On*

When this feature is enabled, you can press the 1-2-3
buttons on the extension phone to cause the product to
answer an incoming fax call.
Sets the product to print the date, time, sender's phone
number, and page number on each page of incoming
faxes.
Setting Private Receive to On requires you to set a
product password. After setting the password, the following
options are set:
●

Private Receive is turned on.

●

All old faxes are deleted from memory.

●

Fax forwarding is set to Off and is not allowed to be
changed.

●

All incoming faxes are stored in memory.

Confirm a fax number by entering it a second time.

Off*

Off
Fax/Tel Ring Time

Enables the use of billing codes when set to On. A prompt
appears where you can enter the billing code for an
outgoing fax.

20
30

Sets whether incoming faxes are stored in memory for
reprinting later.
Sets the time, in seconds, after which the product should
stop sounding the Fax/Tel audible ring to notify the user of
an incoming voice call.

40
70
Fax Speed

Fast(V.34)*

Sets the allowed fax communication speed.

Medium(V.17)
Slow(V.29)

138

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

System Setup menu
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Language

(List of available
control-panel
display languages.)

Paper Setup

Default Paper Size

Sub-menu item

Description
Sets the language in which the control panel displays
messages and product reports.

Letter
A4

Sets the size for printing internal reports, faxes, or any print
job that does not specify a size.

Legal

NOTE: The default setting is determined by the choice of
location during the initial product setup.

Default Paper Type

Lists available
paper types.

Sets the type for printing internal reports, faxes, or any print
job that does not specify a type.

Tray 1

Paper Type

Configures the size and type for the tray.

Paper Size
Paper Out Action

Print Quality

Volume Settings

Color Calibration

Alarm Volume
Ring Volume
Key-Press Volume
Phone Line Volume

ENWW

Wait forever*
Cancel

Determines how the product reacts when a print job
requires a paper size or type that is unavailable or when
the tray is empty.

Override

●

Wait forever: The product waits until you load the
correct paper.

●

Override: Print on a different size paper after a
specified delay.

●

Cancel: Automatically cancel the print job after a
specified delay.

●

If you select either the Override or Cancel item, the
control panel prompts you for the number of seconds
to delay.

Calibrate Now

Performs a full calibration.

Power-On
Calibration

●

Calibrate Now: Performs an immediate calibration.

●

Power-On Calibration: Specify the length of time the
product should wait after you turn it on before it
calibrates.

Set the volume levels for the product. The following options
are available for each volume setting:
●

Off

●

Soft

●

Medium*

●

Loud

Tools for troubleshooting

139

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

PowerSave Time

Sleep Delay

Off

Specifies the amount of idle time before the product enters
sleep mode.

1 Minute
15 Minutes*
30 Minutes
1 Hour
2 Hours
Time/Date

(Settings for time
format, current time,
date format, and
current date.)

Sets the time and date setting for the product.

Product Security

Sets the product-security feature. If you select the On setting,
you must set a password.

Off*
At Very Low

Black Cartridge

Stop
Prompt
Continue*

Color Cartridges

Stop
Prompt
Continue
Print Black*

140

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Sets how the product behaves when the black print
cartridge reaches the very low threshold.
●

Stop: The product stops printing until you replace the
print cartridge.

●

Prompt: The product stops printing and prompts you to
replace the print cartridge. You can acknowledge the
prompt and continue printing.

●

Continue: The product alerts you that the print
cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.

Sets how the product behaves when one of the color print
cartridges reaches the very low threshold.
●

Stop: The product stops printing until you replace the
print cartridge.

●

Prompt: The product stops printing and prompts you to
replace the print cartridge. You can acknowledge the
prompt and continue printing.

●

Continue: The product alerts you that the print
cartridge is very low, but it continues printing.

●

Print Black: When a color print cartridge becomes
very low, the product prints in black only to prevent
fax interruptions. To configure the product to print in
color and use the remaining toner in the print cartridge
past very low, follow these steps:
1.

On the product control panel, touch the Setup
button, and then touch the System Setup button.

Touch the At Very Low button, and then touch the
Color Cartridges button. Touch the Continue
button.

ENWW

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description
When you choose to replace the very low print
cartridge, color printing resumes automatically.

User-Defined Low

Black
Cyan

Type the percentage of estimated life remaining at which
the product alerts you that the print cartridge is low.

Magenta
Yellow
USB Flash Drive

On*

Enables or disables the USB flash drive.

Off
Color Copy

On*

Enables or disables color copying.

Off
Courier Font

Regular*

Sets Courier font values.

Dark

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

141

Service menu
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Fax Service

Clear Saved Faxes

Clears all faxes in memory.

Run Fax Test

Performs a fax test to verify that
the phone cord is plugged in
the correct outlet and that there
is a signal on the phone line. A
fax test report is printed
indicating the results.

Print T.30 Trace

Sub-menu item

Now
Never*

Description

Prints or schedules a report that
is used to troubleshoot fax
transmission issues.

If Error
At End of Call
Error Correction

On*
Off

Fax Service Log

Cleaning Page

The error correction mode
allows the sending device to
re-transmit data if it detects an
error signal.
The fax service log prints out
the last 40 entries in the fax
log.
Cleans the product when
specks or other marks appear
on printed output. The cleaning
process removes dust and
excess toner from the paper
path.
When selected, the product
prompts you to load plain
Letter or A4 paper in Tray 1.
Touch the OK button to begin
the cleaning process. Wait
until the process completes.
Discard the page that prints.

USB Speed

High*
Full

142

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Sets the USB speed for the USB
connection to the computer.
For the product to actually
operate at high speed, it must
have high speed enabled and
be connected to an EHCI host
controller that is also operating
at high speed. This menu item
also does not reflect the current
operating speed of the
product.

ENWW

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Less Paper Curl

On
Off*

Archive Print

On
Off*

ENWW

Sub-menu item

Description
When printed pages are
consistently curled, this option
sets the product to a mode that
reduces curl.
When printing pages that will
be stored for a long time, this
option sets the product to a
mode that reduces toner
smearing and dusting.

Firmware
Datecode

Displays the current firmware
datecode

Restore Defaults

Sets all settings to the factory
default values

Tools for troubleshooting

143

Network Setup menu
In the following table, items that have an asterisk (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Wireless Menu (wireless
models only)

Wireless Setup Wizard

Guides you through the steps to set up the product on a wireless
network

Wi-Fi Protected Setup

If your wireless router supports this feature, use this method to set
up the product on a wireless network. This is the simplest method.

Run Network Test

Tests the wireless network and prints a report with the results.

Turn Wireless On/Off

Enables or disables the wireless network feature.

Automatic*

Automatic: The product automatically configures all the TCP/IP
settings via DHCP, BootP or AutoIP.

TCP/IP Config

Manual

Manual: You can manually configure the IP address, subnet mask,
and default gateway. The control panel prompts you to specify
values for each address section. As each address is completed,
the product prompts for address confirmation before moving to the
next one. After all three addresses are set, the network
reinitializes.
Auto Crossover

On*
Off

Network Services

IPv4
IPv6

Link Speed

Enables or disables the use of a standard 10/100 network cable
when the product is directly connected to a computer.
Enable or disable the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. By default, each
protocol is enabled.

Automatic*

Sets the link speed manually if needed.

10T Full

After setting the link speed, the product automatically restarts.

10T Half
100TX Full
100TX Half
Restore Defaults

144

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Resets all network configurations to their factory defaults.

ENWW

Function specific menus
The product features function-specific menus for copying, faxing, scanning, and using a USB flash
drive. To open these menus, touch the button for that function on the control panel.
Copy Menu
To open this menu, touch the Copy button, and then touch the Settings... button.
NOTE: Settings that you change with this menu expire 2 minutes after the last copy completes.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

ID Copy

Description
Copies both sides of
identification cards, or other
small-size documents, onto
the same side of one sheet of
paper.

NOTE: This item is
available from the main Copy
screen. You do not need to
touch the Settings... button to
access it.
Number of Copies

(1–99)

Specifies the number of
copies

Reduce/Enlarge

Original=100%

Specifies the size of the copy.

Legal to Letter=78%
Legal to A4=83%
A4 to Letter=94%
Letter to A4=97%
Full Page=91%
Fit to Page
2 Pages per Sheet
4 Pages per Sheet
Custom: 25 to 400%
Lighter/Darker

Optimize

Specifies the contrast of the
copy.
Describe Original

Auto Select*
Mixed
Text

Specifies the type of content
in the original document, so
the copy is the best match for
the original.

Picture

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

145

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Paper

Paper Size

Sub-menu item

Description
Specifies the paper size and
type.

Paper Type

NOTE: The default paper
size setting is determined by
the choice of location during
the initial product setup.
The default paper type setting
is plain.
Multi-Page Copy

Off*

When this feature is on, the
product prompts you to load
another page onto the
scanner glass or to indicate
that the job is complete.

Collation

On*

Specifies whether to collate
copy jobs

Off
Draft Mode

Specifies whether to use draftquality printing for copies

Off*
On

Image Adjustment

Lightness

Adjusts the image quality
settings for copies

Contrast
Sharpen
Background Removal
Color Balance
Grayness
Set as New Defaults

Saves any changes you have
made to this menu as the new
defaults

Restore Defaults

Restores the factory defaults
for this menu

Fax Menu
To open this menu, touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Fax Reports

Fax Confirmation

On Every Fax

Sets whether the product
prints a confirmation report
after a successful fax job.

On Send Fax Only
On Receive Fax Only
Never*

146

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Include First Page

On*

Sets whether the product
includes a thumbnail image
of the first page of the fax on
the report.

Off

Fax Error Report

On Every Error*
On Send Error

Sets whether the product
prints a report after a failed
fax job.

On Receive Error
Never
Print Last Call Report

Fax Activity Log

Prints a detailed report of the
last fax operation, either sent
or received.
Print Log Now
Auto Log Print

Print Log Now: Prints a list of
the faxes that have been sent
from or received by this
product.
Auto Log Print: Automatically
prints a report after every fax
job.

Send Options

ENWW

Print Phone Book

Prints a list of the speed dials
that have been set up for this
product.

Print Junk Fax list

Prints a list of phone numbers
that are blocked from sending
faxes to this product.

Print Billing Report

Prints a list of billing codes
that have been used for
outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.
This menu item appears only
when the billing codes
feature is turned on.

Print All fax Reports

Prints all fax-related reports.

Send Fax Later

Allows a fax to be sent at a
later time and date.

Broadcast Fax

Sends a fax to multiple
recipients.

Fax Job Status

Displays pending fax jobs,
and allows you to cancel
pending fax jobs.

Tools for troubleshooting

147

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Fax Resolution

Standard

Sets the resolution for sent
documents. Higher resolution
images have more dots per
inch (dpi), so they show more
detail. Lower resolution
images have fewer dots per
inch and show less detail, but
the file size is smaller.

Fine*
Superfine
Photo

Receive Options

Print Private Faxes

Block Junk Faxes

Prints stored faxes when the
private-receive feature is on.
This menu item appears only
when the private-receive
feature is turned on. The
product prompts you for the
system password.
Add Number
Delete Number
Delete All Numbers
Print Junk Fax list

Reprint Faxes

Forward Fax

Prints the received faxes
stored in available memory.
This item is available only if
you have turned on the Allow
Fax Reprint feature in the Fax
Setup menu.
On
Off*

Phone Book Setup

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Sets product to send all
received faxes to another fax
machine.

Polling Receive

Allows the product to call
another fax machine that has
polling send enabled.

Individual Setup

Edits the fax phone book
speed dials and group-dial
entries. The product supports
up to 120 phone book
entries, which can be either
individual or group entries.

Group Setup

148

Modifies the junk fax list. The
junk fax list can contain up to
30 numbers. When the
product receives a call from
one of the junk fax numbers,
it deletes the incoming fax. It
also logs the junk fax in the
activity log along with jobaccounting information.

Delete Entry

Deletes a specific phone
book entry.

Delete All Entries

Deletes all entries in the
phone book

ENWW

Menu item

Sub-menu item

Print Report Now

Prints a list of all the
individual and group dial
entries in the phone book.

Change Defaults

Description

Opens the Fax Setup menu.

Scan Menu

ENWW

Menu item

Description

Scan to USB Drive

Scans a document and stores it as a .PDF file or .JPEG image
on the USB flash drive.

Tools for troubleshooting

149

USB Flash Drive
The following types are supported:
●

.PDF

●

.JPG

Menu item

Description

Print Documents

Prints documents stored on the USB drive. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the documents. Touch the names of
documents that you want to print.
Touch the summary screen to change settings such as the
number of copies, the paper size, or the paper type.
Touch the Print button when you are ready to print the
documents.

150

View and Print Photos

Previews photos on the USB drive. Use the arrow buttons to
scroll through the photos. Touch the preview image for each
photo that you want to print. You can adjust the settings, and
you can save the changes as the new default settings. When
you are ready to print the photos, touch the Print button.

Scan to USB Drive

Scans a document and stores it as a .PDF file or .JPEG image
on the USB flash drive.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Interpret control-panel messages
Control panel message types
Alert and warning messages appear temporarily and might require you to acknowledge the message
by touching the OK button to resume or by touching the Cancel
button to cancel the job. With
certain warnings, the job might not complete or the print quality might be affected. If the alert or
warning message is related to printing and the auto-continue feature is on, the product will attempt to
resume the printing job after the warning has appeared for 10 seconds without acknowledgement.
Critical error messages can indicate some kind of failure. Turning off and then turning on the power
might fix the problem. If a critical error persists, the product might require service.

Control panel messages
10.100X Supply Memory Error
Description
A specific print cartridge has a faulty or missing memory chip.
"X" indicates the cartridge: 0=black, 1=cyan, 2=magenta, 3=yellow.
Recommended action
Check the memory chip. If it is missing, broken or damaged, replace the cartridge.
Verify that the cartridge is installed in the correct location.
Reinstall the print cartridge.
Turn off and then turn on the product.
If the error persists, replace the cartridge.
49 Error, Turn off then on
Description
The product has experienced an internal embedded software error. Under most conditions, the product
automatically restarts.
Recommended action
Turn off the power by using the power switch, wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the power
and wait for the product to initialize.
If the error persists, try the following solutions:
1.

Perform an NVRAM initialization.

Update the firmware.

50.x Fuser Error
Description

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

151

The product has experienced an internal hardware error.
●

50.1
Low fuser temperature error

●

50.2
Slow fuser error

●

50.3
High fuser temperature error

●

50.4
Fuser drive circuit error

●

50.7
Fuser open error

●

50.8
Low subthermistor fuser error

●

50.9
High subthermistor fuser error

Recommended action

152

Turn off the power by using the power switch, and then wait at least 30 seconds.

If a surge protector is being used, remove it. Plug the product directly into the wall socket.

Turn on the power and wait for the product to initialize.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

79 Error Turn off then on
Description
The product has experienced an internal firmware error. Under most conditions, the product
automatically restarts.
Recommended action
Turn off the power by using the power switch, wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the power
and wait for the product to initialize.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it. Plug the product directly into the wall socket. Use the
power switch to turn the product on.
If the error persists, try the following solutions:
1.

Perform an NVRAM initialization.

Update the firmware.

Black Cartridge Low
Description
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.
Recommended action
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.
Black in wrong position
Description
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.
Recommended action
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Black Very Low
Description
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the At Very Low menu item in the System Setup
menu is set to Continue.
Recommended action
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.
Once an HP supply has reached “very low”, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very low

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

153

mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print
Cartridge Warranty Statement.

154

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Canceled scan. Clear document
Description
button while scanning,
A page might be jammed in the document feeder. You touched the Cancel
faxing, or copying to cancel the current job while pages were feeding from the document feeder. The
cancel process does not automatically clear the document feeder.
Recommended action
Remove the jammed item. Then, clear the items in the document feeder tray and start over.
Communication error.
Description
A fax communication error occurred between the product and the sender or receiver.
Recommended action
Allow the product to retry sending the fax. Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a
telephone, and try making a call. Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.
Try a different phone cord.
Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow(V.29) setting or disable the Fast(V.34) setting.
Turn off the Error Correction feature to prevent automatic error correction.
NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction feature can reduce image quality.
Print the Fax Activity Log report from the control panel to determine if the error occurs with a specific
fax number.
Cyan Cartridge Low
Description
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.
Recommended action
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.
Cyan in wrong position
Description
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.
Recommended action
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

155

Cyan Very Low
Description
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the At Very Low menu item in the System Setup
menu is set to Continue.
Recommended action
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.
Once an HP supply has reached “very low”, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very low
mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print
Cartridge Warranty Statement.
Device error, press OK
Description
Generic engine error.
Recommended action
This is a warning message only. Job output might be affected.
If the error persists, try the following solutions:
1.

Turn off, then on.

Perform an NVRAM initialization.

Update the firmware.

Replace the product.

Device is busy. Try again later
Description
The product is currently in use.
Recommended action
Wait for the product to finish the current job, or to finish initializing.
Document feeder jam. Clear and reload.
Description
A piece of paper is jammed in the document feeder tray.
Recommended action
Clear the jam.
If the error persists, replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly.

156

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Document feeder mispick. Reload
Description
The product did not pick up the paper in the document feeder.
Recommended action
Remove the paper from the document feeder tray, and then reload it.
If the error persists, try the following solutions:
▲

Clean the roller.

Door open
Description
The print cartridge door is open.
Recommended action
Close the print cartridge door.
Engine Communication Error
Description
The product has experienced an engine communication time-out error.
Recommended action
Turn off the power by using the power switch, wait at least 30 seconds, and then turn on the power
and wait for the product to initialize.
If a surge protector is being used, remove it. Plug the product directly into the wall socket. Use the
power switch to turn the product on.
Engine error. Press OK to continue.
Description
The product experienced a print engine error.
Recommended action
This is a warning message only. Job output might be affected.
Fax is busy. Canceled send.
Description
The fax line to which you were sending a fax was busy. The product has canceled sending the fax.
Recommended action
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

157

Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.
Check that the Redial if Busy option is enabled.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
Fax is busy. Redial pending.
Description
The fax line to which you were sending a fax was busy. The product automatically redials the busy
number.
Recommended action
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
Fax receive error.
Description
An error occurred while trying to receive a fax.
Recommended action
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Try faxing back to the sender or another fax machine.
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected by unplugging and replugging the cord.
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
Decrease the fax speed. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Turn off error-correction mode. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
NOTE: Turning off error-correction mode can reduce the quality of the fax image.
Connect the product to a different phone line.

158

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Fax Send error.
Description
An error occurred while trying to send a fax.
Recommended action
Try resending the fax.
Try faxing to another fax number.
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected by unplugging and replugging the cord.
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
Connect the product to a different phone line.
Set the fax resolution to Standard instead of the default of Fine.
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax receive.
Description
The amount of available memory for storing faxes is insufficient to store an incoming fax.
Recommended action
If you are using the Private Receive feature, print all received faxes to regain some memory.
If you still need more memory, clear faxes from memory. Open the Service menu. In the Fax Service
menu, select the Clear Saved Faxes option.
Fax storage is full. Canceling the fax send.
Description
During the fax job, the memory filled. All pages of the fax have to be in memory for a fax job to work
correctly. Only the pages that fit into memory were sent.
Recommended action
Cancel the current job. Turn the product off, and then turn it on again. Try sending the job again.
If the error reoccurs, cancel the job and turn the product off and then on a second time. The product
might not have enough memory for some jobs.
Fit to Page on flatbed only
Description
The copy reduce/enlarge feature (called "Fit to Page") applies only to copies made from the flatbed
scanner.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

159

Recommended action
Use the flatbed or select another reduction/enlargement setting.
Install [color] cartridge
Description
One of the color cartridges is not installed with the door closed.
Recommended action
Install the indicated color cartridge.
If the error persists, replace the print cartridge drawer.
Invalid driver Press OK
Description
You are using the incorrect printer driver.
Recommended action
Select the printer driver that is appropriate for your product.
Invalid entry
Description
Invalid data or response.
Recommended action
Correct the entry.
Jam in (area), Open door and clear jam
Description
There is a paper jam in the print paper path or output bin.
Recommended action
Clear the jam from the area indicated on the product control panel, and then follow the control panel
instructions.
Remove any debris from the paper path.
Jam in Tray 1, Clear jam and then press OK
Description
The product has detected a jam in Tray 1.
Recommended action
Clear the jam, and then follow the control panel instructions.

160

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Load paper
Description
The tray is empty.
Recommended action
If paper is already loaded in the tray, test the paper sensors.
Load Tray 1 , Press OK to use available media
Description
Device is processing a job, but the tray does not match.
Recommended action
Load paper in the correct orientation.
Touch the OK button to use existing tray settings.
Load Tray 1, / Cleaning mode, OK to start
Description
Cleaning mode paper prompt.
Recommended action
Load a clean sheet of paper in the correct orientation, then touch the OK button to begin the cleaning
procedures.
Magenta Cartridge Low
Description
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.
Recommended action
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.
Magenta in wrong position
Description
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.
Recommended action
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Magenta Very Low
Description

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

161

The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the At Very Low menu item in the System Setup
menu is set to Continue.
Recommended action
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.
Once an HP supply has reached “very low”, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very low
mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print
Cartridge Warranty Statement.
Manual Duplex Load Tray 1, Press OK
Description
Manual duplex mode.
Recommended action
Load paper in the correct orientation.
Manual feed , Press OK to use available media
Description
Print Manual Feed mode.
Recommended action
Load paper into Tray 1.
Memory is low. Try again later
Description
The product does not have enough memory to start a new job.
Recommended action
Wait until the current job is finished before starting a new job.
Turn the product off and then on to clear the memory.
If the error persists, try the following solutions:
1.

Perform an NVRAM initialization.

Update the firmware.

Memory is low. Press OK.
Description
The product memory has been almost completely filled.

162

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Recommended action
Touch the OK button to cancel the job.
Break the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.
Turn the product off and then on to clear the memory.
Memory low Only 1 copy made. Press OK to continue.
Description
The product does not have enough memory to complete the collated copy job.
Recommended action
Break the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.
Turn the product off and then on to clear the memory.
Misprint, Press OK
Description
Feed delay misprint.
Recommended action
Verify that paper is loaded in the input tray.
Reload paper.
No dial tone.
Description
The product could not detect a dial tone.
Recommended action
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by touching the Start Fax button.
Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.
Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

163

No fax answer. Canceled send.
Description
Attempts to redial a fax number failed, or the Redial if No Answer option was turned off.
Recommended action
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.
Check that the redial option is enabled.
Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
No fax answer. Redial pending.
Description
The receiving fax line did not answer. The product attempts to redial after a few minutes.
Recommended action
Allow the product to retry sending the fax.
Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.
Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.
If the product continues to redial, unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone,
and try making a voice call.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.
No fax detected.
Description
The product answered the incoming call but did not detect that a fax machine was calling.
Recommended action
Allow the product to retry receiving the fax.
Open the Service menu, and touch the Fax Service button. Touch the Run Fax Test button. This test
verifies that the phone cord is connected to the correct port and that the phone line has a signal. The
product prints a report with the results.

164

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Print failure, press OK. If error repeats, turn off then on.
Description
The product could not print the current page because of its complexity.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to clear the message.
Replace [color]
Description
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the At Very Low menu item in the System Setup
menu is set to Stop.
Recommended action
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.
Once an HP supply has reached “very low”, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very low
mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print
Cartridge Warranty Statement.
Scanner error #, Turn off then on
Description
The product has experienced an error in the scanner sub-assembly area.
Recommended action
●

Scanner error 12, Turn off then on
Motor test failure. This error will only appear on the Error report. The document-feeder motor is not
blocked from turning.

●

Clear any jammed paper from the document feeder.

Turn the product off, and then on.

Scanner error 13, Turn off then on
RAM Wall failure. This error appears on the control panel. The scanner motor or scanner module
is obstructed.
▲

●

ENWW

Turn the product off, and then on.

Scanner error 14, Turn off then on

Tools for troubleshooting

165

LED test failure. This error will only appear on the Error report. The LED did not illuminate during
initialization.
◦
●

Replace the document-feeder scanner assembly.

Scanner error 17, Turn off then on
Scanner error. This error appears on the control panel. The scanner motor is obstructed.

Scanner reserved for PC scan
Description
A computer is using the product to create a scan.
Recommended action
Wait until the computer scan has finished, or cancel the scan from the computer software, or touch the
button.
Cancel
Scanning error Cannot connect
Description
The product cannot transmit scan information to a computer.
Recommended action
Verify that the connection cable is not loose or damaged. Replace the cable if necessary, and try the
scan again.
Settings cleared
Description
The product has cleared job settings.
Recommended action
Re-enter any appropriate job settings.
Used [color] installed, to accept press OK
Description
A used color printer cartridge has been installed or moved.
Recommended action
Touch the OK button to return to the Ready state.
Yellow Cartridge Low
Description
The print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life.

166

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Recommended action
Printing can continue, but consider having a replacement supply on hand.
Yellow in wrong position
Description
The print cartridge is installed in the incorrect slot.
Recommended action
Make sure that each print cartridge is installed in the correct slot. From front to back, the print
cartridges are installed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Yellow Very Low
Description
The print cartridge is at the end of its useful life, and the At Very Low menu item in the System Setup
menu is set to Continue.
Recommended action
To ensure optimal print quality, HP recommends replacing the print cartridge at this point. You can
continue printing until you notice a decrease in print quality. Actual cartridge life may vary.
Once an HP supply has reached “very low”, HP's premium Protection Warranty on that supply has
ended. All print defects or cartridge failures incurred when an HP supply is used in continue at very low
mode will not be considered to be defects in materials or workmanship in the supply under the HP Print
Cartridge Warranty Statement.

ENWW

Tools for troubleshooting

167

Event-log messages
The following product events do not produce a message that appears on the control panel. Instead,
they are recorded in the event log. To print the event log, open the secondary service menu, select
Service Reports, and then select Error Report.
Table 6-1 Event-log messages

168

Event code

Description

13.0000

Paper jam

20.0000

Memory out

21.0000

Page misfeed or mispick

41.2000

Beam detect malfunction

41.3000

Unexpected size

50.1000

Low fuser temperature error

50.2000

Slow fuser error

50.3000

High fuser temperature error

50.4000

Fuser drive circuit error

50.7000

Fuser open error

50.8000

Low subthermistor fuser error

50.9000

High subthermistor fuser error

51.2000

Black scanner laser error

51.2100

Cyan scanner laser error

51.2200

Magenta scanner laser error

51.2300

Yellow scanner laser error

54.0600

Density sensor error

54.1200

Black density measurement abnormality

54.1201

Cyan density measurement abnormality

54.1202

Magenta density measurement abnormality

54.1203

Yellow density measurement abnormality

54.1400

Color plane registration sensor error

54.1599

Black CPR pattern can't be read

54.1501

Cyan CPR pattern can't be read

54.1502

Magenta CPR pattern can't be read

54.1503

Yellow CPR pattern can't be read

54.1500

Yellow toner level sensor error

54.1600

Magenta toner level sensor error

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 6-1 Event-log messages (continued)

ENWW

Event code

Description

54.1700

Cyan toner level sensor error

54.1800

Black toner level sensor error

54.1900

Bad top-of-page (TOP) sensor

54.2100

Beam detect (BD) error

55.0000

Engine internal communication error

55.0601

DC controller NVRAM data error

55.0602

DC controller NVRAM access error

55.1000

DC controller memory error

59.0160

ITB or main motor rotation error (59.A0)

59.0192

Developer motor rotation error (59.C0)

59.0240

Transfer alienation failure (59.F0)

59.3000

Fuser motor startup error

59.4000

Fuser motor error

59.5000

Image drum motor startup error—black

59.5300

Image drum motor startup error—yellow

59.6000

Image drum motor rotation error- black

59.6300

Image drum motor rotation error- yellow

59.7000

Black developer motor startup error

59.7300

Yellow developer motor startup error

59.8000

Black developer motor rotation error

59.8300

Yellow developer motor rotation error

59.9000

Main motor start error

Tools for troubleshooting

169

Menu map
Use the following procedure to print a control-panel menu layout map.

170

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Reports button.

Touch the Menu Structure button.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

button.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
●

The product does not pick up paper

●

The product picks up multiple sheets of paper

●

Prevent paper jams

●

Clear jams

The product does not pick up paper
If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.

Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.

Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.

Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not
fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray,
straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

Prevent paper jams
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.

ENWW

Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.

Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different
package.

Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.

Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray,
straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

171

Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the
guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.

Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.

Clear jams
Jam locations
Jams can occur in these locations:

2
3

Document feeder

Output bin

Tray 1

Rear door

Loose toner might remain in the product after a jam. This problem typically resolves itself after a few
sheets have been printed.

172

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Clear jams from the document feeder
1.

Turn the product off.

Open the document feeder cover.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

173

Lift the document feeder mechanism, and
gently pull the jammed paper out.

Close the document feeder cover.

174

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Clear jams from the input tray
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damage caused by sharp objects is not covered by the warranty.
When removing jammed paper, pull it straight out from the product. Pulling jammed paper out of the
product at an angle can damage the product.
NOTE: Depending on where the jam is located, some of the following steps might not be necessary.
1.

Remove Tray 1, and lift the jam access door
above the tray.

With both hands, grasp the paper, and
carefully pull it free from the product.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

175

Open the rear door.
CAUTION: The fuser, located in the back of
the product, is hot. Wait for the fuser to cool
before continuing.

With both hands, grasp the paper, and
carefully pull it free from the product.

Reinsert the tray.

176

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Close the rear output door.

Print a cleaning page, which removes excess
toner from the paper path.
a. From the Home screen, touch the Setup
button.
b. Touch the Service menu.
c. Touch the Cleaning Page button.
d. Load plain letter or A4 paper when you
are prompted.
e. Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning
process.
A page feeds through the product slowly.
Discard the page when the process is
completed.

ENWW

Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed

177

Clear jams from the output bin
CAUTION: Do not use sharp objects, such as tweezers or needle-nose pliers, to remove jams.
Damage caused by sharp objects will not be covered by the warranty.
1.

178

With both hands, grasp the paper, and
carefully pull it free from the product.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Improve print quality
You can prevent most print-quality problems by following these guidelines.
●

Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver

●

Adjust color settings in the printer driver

●

Use paper that meets HP specifications

●

Print a cleaning page

●

Calibrate the product to align the colors

●

Check the print cartridges

●

Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs

●

Improve print quality for copies

Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver
Check the paper type setting if you are having any of the following problems:
●

Toner is smearing on the printed pages.

●

Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.

●

Printed pages are curled.

●

Toner flakes off the printed pages.

●

Printed pages have small unprinted areas.

Change the paper type setting for Windows
1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.

Click the Paper/Quality tab.

From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.

Expand the list of Type is: options.

Expand each category of paper types until you find the paper type that you are using.

Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.

Change the paper type setting for Mac

ENWW

On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.

In the Copies & Pages menu, click the Page Setup button.

Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list, and then click the OK button.

Improve print quality

179

Open the Finishing menu.

Select a type from the Media-type drop-down list.

Click the Print button.

Adjust color settings in the printer driver
Change the color theme for a print job
1.

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

Click Properties or Preferences.

Click the Color tab.

Select a color theme from the Color Themes drop-down list.

●

Default (sRGB): This theme sets the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. When
using this theme, manage color in the software program or in the operating system for correct
rendering.

●

Vivid: The product increases the color saturation in the midtones. Use this theme when
printing business graphics.

●

Photo: The product interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph using a digital
mini lab. The product renders deeper, more saturated colors differently than with the Default
(sRBG) theme. Use this theme when printing photos.

●

Photo (Adobe RGB 1998): Use this theme with printing digital photos that use the
AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. Turn off color management in the software
program when using this theme.

●

None

Change the color options
Change the color options settings for the current print job from the color tab of the printer driver.

180

On the File menu in the software program, click Print.

Click Properties or Preferences.

Click the Color tab.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Click the Automatic or Manual setting.
●

Automatic setting: Select this setting for most color print jobs

●

Manual setting: Select this setting to adjust the color settings independent from other
settings.
NOTE: Changing color settings manually can impact output. HP recommends that only
color graphics experts change these settings.

ENWW

Click the Print in Grayscale option to print a color document in black and white. Use this
option to print color documents for photocopying or faxing.

Click the OK button.

Improve print quality

181

Use paper that meets HP specifications
Use different paper if you are having any of the following problems:
●

The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

●

Specks of toner are on the printed pages.

●

Toner is smearing on the printed pages.

●

Printed characters seem misformed.

●

Printed pages are curled.

Always use a paper type and weight that this product supports. In addition, follow these guidelines
when selecting paper:
●

Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust,
wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.

●

Use paper that has not been previously printed on.

●

Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use
in Inkjet printers.

●

Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.

Print a cleaning page
Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the paper path if you are having any of the
following problems:
●

Specks of toner are on the printed pages.

●

Toner is smearing on the printed pages.

●

Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.

Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Service menu.

Touch the Cleaning Page button.

Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are prompted.

Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning process.

button.

A page feeds through the product slowly. Discard the page when the process is completed.

182

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Calibrate the product to align the colors
If the printed output has colored shadows, blurry graphics, or areas that have poor color, you might
need to calibrate the product to align the colors. Print the Diagnostics Page from the Reports menu on
the control panel to check the color alignment. If the blocks of color on that page are not aligned with
each other, you need to calibrate the product.
1.

On the product control panel, open the System Setup menu.

Open the Print Quality menu, and select the Color Calibration item.

Select the Calibrate Now option.

Check the print cartridges
Check each print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following
problems:
●

The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.

●

Printed pages have small unprinted areas.

●

Printed pages have streaks or bands.

NOTE: If you are using a draft print setting, the printing might appear light.
If you determine that you need to replace a print cartridge, print the Supplies Status Page to find the
part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.

ENWW

Type of print cartridge

Steps to resolve the problem

Refilled or remanufactured print
cartridge

Hewlett Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either
new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence
their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured
print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with
a genuine HP cartridge that has the words “HP” or “Hewlett-Packard” on it, or has
the HP logo on it.

Genuine HP print cartridge

The product control panel or the Supplies Status page indicates Very Low
status when the cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life. Replace the
print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.

Print a Print Quality Page from the Reports menu on the control panel. If streaks
or marks are in one color on the page, you might have a defect in that color
cartridge. See the instructions in this document for interpreting the page.
Replace the print cartridge if necessary.

Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that follow.
Replace the print cartridge if necessary.

If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance
apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the
repetitive defects ruler in this document to identify the cause of the problem.

Improve print quality

183

Print the Supplies Status page
The Supplies Status page indicates the estimated life remaining in print cartridges. It also lists the part
number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge for your product so you can order a replacement
print cartridge, as well as other useful information.

184

On the product control panel, open the Reports menu.

Select the Supplies Status page to print it.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Interpret the Print Quality Page
1.

On the product control panel, open the Reports menu.

Select the Print Quality Page item to print it.

This page contains five bands of color, which are divided into four groups as indicated in the following
illustration. By examining each group, you can isolate the problem to a particular print cartridge.

ENWW

Section

Print-cartridge

Yellow

Cyan

Black

Magenta

●

If dots or streaks appear in only one of the groups, replace the print cartridge that correlates with
that group.

●

If dots appear in more than one group, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem,
determine if the dots are always the same color; for example, if magenta dots appear in all five
color bands. If the dots are all the same color, replace that print cartridge.

●

If streaks appear in multiple color bands, contact HP. A component other than the print cartridge is
probably causing the problem.

Improve print quality

185

Inspect the print cartridge for damage
1.

Remove the print cartridge from the product, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.

Check the memory chip for damage.

Examine the surface of the green imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green roller (imaging drum) on the bottom of the cartridge.
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.

186

If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the print
cartridge.

If the imaging drum does not appear to be damaged, rock the print cartridge gently several times
and reinstall it. Print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Repetitive image defects
If the product output has a consistent, repetitive defect, then use the table in this section to determine
which part needs to be replaced based on the measured distance between the repetitions of the defect.
NOTE: The following table replaces the graphical repetitive defect ruler. You can make your own
ruler by using these measurements. For the most accurate results, use a metric ruler.
Table 6-2 Repetitive image defects

ENWW

Distance between
identical defects

Component

Notes

22.3 mm (0.87 in)

Developer roller (one rotation)

Appears in a single color plane.

26.7 mm (1.05 in)

Charger roller

Appears in a single color plane.

28.5 mm (1.12 in)

Developer RS roller (one rotation)

Inside developer, this roller removes and supplies toner to
the developer sleeve.

44.0 mm (1.73 in)

Registration roller

56.5 mm (2.22 in)

Fuser film (one rotation)

Appears in all color planes.

56.8 mm (2.23 in)

Fuser pressure roller (one
rotation)

Appears in all color planes.

57.0 mm (2.24 in)

Transfer roller

Appears in all color planes.

69.0 mm (2.71 in)

Cartridge-to-cartridge spacing

Distance between each color image drum

75.8 mm (2.98 in)

Image drum (one rotation)

Appears in a single color plane and might be either a dark
or white spot.

633.6 mm (24.94 in)

ITB

Because the ITB is longer than a page, you might have to
look at multiple pages to determine if repetitive defect is
present.

Improve print quality

187

Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs
You might need to use a different printer driver if the printed page has unexpected lines in graphics,
missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
HP PCL 6 driver

HP UPD PS driver

HP UPD PCL 5

●

Provided as the default driver. This driver is automatically installed unless you
select a different one.

●

Recommended for all Windows environments

●

Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for
most users

●

Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the
best speed in Windows environments

●

Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs
that are based on PCL 5

●

Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other
highly graphics-intensive software programs

●

Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript
flash font support

●

Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments

●

Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products

●

The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs

●

The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the
product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)

●

Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single
driver for use with multiple printer models

●

Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows
computer

Download additional printer drivers from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/CM1410series.

188

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Improve print quality for copies
If you encounter print quality problems in copied documents, review the solutions for printed documents
listed previously in this document. However, some print-quality problems occur only in copied
documents.
●

If streaks appear on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the small glass strip on the
left side of the scanner assembly.

●

If dots or other defects appear on copies made by using the scanner glass, clean the scanner glass
and the white plastic backing.

Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical
socket.

Open the scanner lid.

Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids
directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.

ENWW

Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.

Improve print quality

189

Clean the product
Clean the exterior
Use a damp lint-free cloth to wipe the exterior of the product.

Clean the paper path
During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the product. Over
time, this buildup can cause print-quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. This product has a
cleaning mode that can correct and prevent these types of problems.

Clean the paper path from the product control panel
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup
button.

Touch the Service menu.

Touch the Cleaning Page button.

Load plain letter or A4 paper when you are
prompted.

Touch the OK button to begin the cleaning
process.
A page feeds through the product slowly.
Discard the page when the process is
completed.

Clean the scanner glass strip and platen
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can
affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.

190

Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical
socket.

Open the scanner lid.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been
moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.

CAUTION: Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon
tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids
directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.
4.

Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.

Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.

Clean the document feeder pickup rollers and separation pad
If the product document feeder experiences paper-handling problems, such as jams or multiple-page
feeds, clean the document feeder rollers and separation pad.
1.

ENWW

Open the document feeder cover.

Clean the product

191

Use a moist, lint-free cloth to wipe both pickup rollers and the separation pad to remove dirt.

Close the document feeder cover.

Clean the touch screen
Clean the touch screen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touch screen
gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touch screen. Do not pour or spray
water directly onto the touch screen.

192

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

The product does not print or it prints slowly
The product does not print
If the product does not print at all, try the following solutions.
1.

Make sure the product is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.
◦

If the control panel does not indicate the product is ready, turn the product off and then on
again.

◦

If the control panel indicates the product is ready, try sending the job again.

If the control panel indicates the product has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the
job again.

Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the product is connected to a network, check
the following items:
◦

Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network is active, the
light is green.

◦

Make sure that you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to the
network.

◦

Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.

Install the HP software from the CD that came with the product. Using generic printer drivers can
cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.

From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties,
and open the Ports tab.
◦

If you are using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed
on the Ports tab matches the product name on the product configuration page.

◦

If you are using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network, make sure the box is
checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be blocking communication
with the product. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.

If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.
NOTE: A blue LED on the product control panel is illumintated when the wireless function is
enabled and available.

ENWW

The product does not print or it prints slowly

193

The product prints slowly
If the product prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.

194

Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this product. For a list of
specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/CM1410series.

When you configure the product to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the product
prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not
correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.

If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or
interference might be delaying print jobs.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Solve walk-up USB printing problems
●

The USB Flash Drive menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory

●

The file does not print from the USB storage accessory

●

The file that you want to print is not listed in the USB Flash Drive menu

The USB Flash Drive menu does not open when you insert the USB
accessory
1.

You might be using a USB storage accessory or a file system that this product does not support.
Save the files on a standard USB storage accessory that uses File Allocation Table (FAT) file
systems. The product supports FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32 USB storage accessories.

If another menu is already open, close that menu and then reinsert the USB storage accessory.

The USB storage accessory might have multiple partitions. (Some USB storage accessory
manufacturers install software on the accessory that creates partitions, similar to a CD.) Reformat
the USB storage accessory to remove the partitions, or use a different USB storage accessory.

The USB storage accessory might require more power than the product can provide.

Remove the USB storage accessory.

Turn the product off and then on.

Use a USB storage accessory that has its own power supply or that requires less power.

The USB storage accessory might not be functioning correctly.
a.

Remove the USB storage accessory.

Turn the product off and then on.

Try printing from another USB storage accessory.

The file does not print from the USB storage accessory
1.

Make sure paper is in the tray.

Check the control panel for messages. If paper is jammed in the product, clear the jam.

The file that you want to print is not listed in the USB Flash Drive
menu

ENWW

You might be trying to print a file type that the USB printing feature does not support. The product
supports .PDF and .JPEG file types.

You might have too many files in a single folder on the USB storage accessory. Reduce the
number of files in the folder by moving them to subfolders.

You might be using a character set for the file name that the product does not support. In this case,
the product replaces the file names with characters from a different character set. Rename the files
using ASCII characters.
Solve walk-up USB printing problems

195

Solve connectivity problems
Solve direct-connect problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
●

Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

●

Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable.

●

Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if
necessary.

Solve network problems
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before
beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address
that is listed on this page.
●

Poor physical connection

●

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

●

The computer is unable to communicate with the product

●

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network

●

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems

●

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly

●

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

Poor physical connection
1.

Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.

Verify that cable connections are secure.

Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity
light and the green link-status light are lit.

If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.

The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product

196

Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the
product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.

If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always
print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of
the IP address.

If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.

The computer is unable to communicate with the product
1.

Test network communication by pinging the network.
a.

Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and
then type cmd.

Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.

If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network
settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change
these settings, you must also change them for your network.

New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer
driver.

The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
1.

Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection.

Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.

The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect

ENWW

Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.

Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.

Solve connectivity problems

197

Solve wireless network problems
NOTE: Wireless models only.
●

Wireless connectivity checklist

●

The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on this product has been turned off

●

The product does not print after the wireless configuration completes

●

The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party firewall installed

●

The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless router or product

●

Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product

●

The wireless product loses communication when connected to a VPN

●

The network does not appear in the wireless networks list

●

The wireless network is not functioning

Wireless connectivity checklist

198

●

The product and the wireless router are turned on and have power. Also make sure the wireless
radio in the product is turned on.

●

The service set identifier (SSID) is correct. Print a configuration page to determine the SSID. If you
are not sure the SSID is correct, run the wireless setup again.

●

With secured networks, make sure the security information is correct. If the security information is
incorrect, run the wireless setup again.

●

If the wireless network is working correctly, try accessing other computers on the wireless network.
If the network has Internet access, try connecting to the Internet over a wireless connection.

●

The encryption method (AES or TKIP) is the same for the product as it is for the wireless access
point (on networks using WPA security).

●

The product is within the range of the wireless network. For most networks, the product must be
within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point (wireless router).

●

Obstacles do not block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access
point and the product. Make sure poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete
do not separate the product and wireless access point.

●

The product is located away from electronic devices that might interfere with the wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal including motors, cordless phones, security
system cameras, other wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.

●

The printer driver is installed on the computer.

●

You have selected the correct printer port.

●

The computer and product connect to the same wireless network.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

The control panel displays the message: The wireless feature on
this product has been turned off
1.

Touch the Wireless Menu button.

Touch the Turn Wireless On/Off button, and then touch the On button.

The product does not print after the wireless configuration
completes
1.

Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state.

Make sure you are connecting to the correct wireless network.

Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.

Open the Network Setup menu, and then open the Wireless Menu item.

Select the Run Network Test item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report with
the results.

Make sure that the correct port or product is selected.
a.

From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click
Properties, and then open the Ports tab.

Make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.

Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart your computer.

The product does not print, and the computer has a third-party
firewall installed
1.

Update the firewall with the most recent update available from the manufacturer.

If programs request firewall access when you install the product or try to print, make sure you
allow the programs to run.

Temporarily turn off the firewall, and then install the wireless product on the computer. Enable the
firewall when you have completed the wireless installation.

The wireless connection does not work after moving the wireless
router or product
Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that your computer connects to.

ENWW

Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.

Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the printer
configuration for your computer.

If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network. Reconfigure the
wireless setup for your product.

Solve wireless network problems

199

Cannot connect more computers to the wireless product
1.

Make sure that the other computers are within the wireless range and that no obstacles block the
signal. For most networks, the wireless range is within 30 m (100 ft) of the wireless access point.

Make sure the product is turned on and in the ready state.

Turn off any third-party firewalls on your computer.

Make sure that the wireless network is working correctly.

On the product control panel, open the Network Setup menu, and then open the Wireless
Menu item.

Select the Run Network Test item to test the wireless network. The product prints a report with
the results.

Make sure that the correct port or product is selected.
a.

From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click
Properties, and then open the Ports tab.

Click the Configure Port button to verify that the IP address matches the IP address listed
on the Run Network Test report.

Make sure that your computer is working correctly. If necessary, restart your computer.

The wireless product loses communication when connected to a
VPN
●

Typically, you cannot connect to a VPN and other networks at the same time.

The network does not appear in the wireless networks list

200

●

Make sure the wireless router is turned on and has power.

●

The network might be hidden. However, you can still connect to a hidden network.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

The wireless network is not functioning
1.

To verify if the network has lost communication, try connecting other devices to the network.

Test network communication by pinging the network.

ENWW

Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and
then type cmd.

Type ping followed by the service set identifier (SSID) for your network.

If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.

Make sure that the router or product connects to the same network that your computer connects to.
a.

Open the Reports menu, and select the Configuration Report item to print the report.

Compare the service set identifier (SSID) on the configuration report to the SSID in the printer
configuration for your computer.

If the SSIDs are not the same, the devices are not connecting to the same network.
Reconfigure the wireless setup for your product.

Solve wireless network problems

201

Service mode functions
Secondary service menu
Use the secondary service menu to print service-related reports and to run special tests. Customers do
not have access to this menu.

Open the secondary service menu
1.

Touch the Setup

Touch the middle of the screen along the left-hand edge (callout 1), and then immediately touch
the lower-right corner (callout 2) of the screen.

button.

1
2

When the Home screen appears, touch the Setup

Touch the 2ndary Service button to open the menu.

button.

TIP: When you are finished with the 2ndary Service menu, touch the lower-right corner of the
screen until the Job Settings Cleared message appears on the Home screen. This step removes
the 2ndary Service option from the Setup Menu.

Secondary service menu structure
Table 6-3 Secondary service menu
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Service Reports

Cont. Self-Test

This item prints a continuous configuration
page.

Error report

This item prints an error report that contains
the last 5 instances of 49 Error, Turn off
then on or 79 Error Turn off then on
errors.

A list of available locations appears

This item sets certain product parameters that
are dependent on the location, such as the
default paper size and the symbol set.

Location

Scroll to the appropriate location and select
Yes to set the location. The product
automatically restarts after you change the
location.

202

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 6-3 Secondary service menu (continued)
Menu item

Sub-menu item

Description

Display test

This test verifies that the LEDs and characters
on the control-panel display function
correctly.
At the beginning of the test, each of the LEDs
is turned on one-at-time. Touch the OK button
to continue to the next LED.
After the LED test is complete, the character
test begins by testing the pixels on each line.
Then, each of the 255 characters is
displayed in groups of 16. Touch the OK
button to continue to the next group of 16
characters. You can cancel the test at any
button.
time by touching the Cancel

Button test

This test verifies that the control-panel buttons
function correctly. The display prompts you
to press each button.

Color Cal.

PBX ring detect

Adjust color

This item adjusts density settings for contrast,
highlights, midtones, and shadows. Adjust
each color individually.

Timing

This item specifies how frequently the product
should automatically perform a color
calibration. The default setting is 48 hours.
You can turn automatic calibration off.

On or Off

Configure the PBX ring detect setting.

Clean Belt

This item runs additional belt-cleaning cycles.

Pick roller

This item puts the pickup roller in position for
replacement.

Product resets
The product resets—Restore Defaults and the NVRAM initialization—perform the same function. If
possible, use the Restore Defaults function in the Service menu. If that menu is not accessible, use
the NVRAM sequence.

Restore the factory-set defaults
CAUTION: Restoring the factory-set defaults returns all of the product and network settings to the
factory defaults, and it also clears the fax header name, phone number, and any stored faxes in the
product memory. This procedure also clears the fax phone book, and deletes any pages that are stored
in the memory. The procedure then automatically restarts the product.

ENWW

On the product control panel, touch the Setup

Scroll to and touch the Service menu.

Scroll to and touch the Restore Defaults button, and then touch the OK button.

button.

Service mode functions

203

The product automatically restarts.

NVRAM initialization
Performing an NVRAM initialization resets the following settings and information:
●

All menu settings are reset to factory default values.

●

All localization settings, including language and country/region, are reset.

CAUTION: All onboard network settings are also reset. Be sure to print a configuration page before
restoring defaults. Make note of the IP address that is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. You
might need to restore the IP address after an NVRAM initialization.
After performing an NVRAM initialization, reconfigure any computers that print to this product.
Uninstall and then reinstall the product software on the computers.
1.

Turn the product off.

Touch the right arrow button. Hold this button as you turn the product on.
NOTE: The right arrow button is not visible when the product is off, but it is still active. Note its
position before you turn off the product.

When Permanent storage init. appears on the display, release the right arrow button.

When the product has finished the NVRAM initialization, it returns to the Ready state.

Solve fax problems
Fax troubleshooting checklist

204

●

Several possible fixes are available. After each recommended action, retry faxing to see if the
problem is resolved.

●

For best results during fax problem solving, make sure the line from the product is plugged directly
into the wall phone port. Disconnect all other devices that are connected to the product.

Verify that the telephone cord is plugged into the correct port on the back of the product.

Check the phone line by using the fax test:
a.

On the control panel, open the Setup

Select the Fax Service option.

Select the Run Fax Test option. The product prints a fax test report.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

menu, and then open the Service menu.

ENWW

The report contains the following possible results:

●

Pass: The report contains all of the current fax settings for review.

●

Fail: The cord is in the wrong port. The report contains suggestions for how to resolve
the issue.

●

Fail : The phone line is not active. The report contains suggestions for how to resolve
the issue.

Verify that the product firmware is current:
a.

Print a configuration page from the control panel Reports menu to obtain the current firmware
date code.

Go to www.hp.com.
1.

Click the Support & Drivers link.

Click the Download drivers and software (and firmware) link option.

In the For product box, type the product model number, and then click the Go button.

Click the link for your operating system.

Scroll to the Firmware section of the table.
◦

If the listed version matches the version on the configuration page, you have the
most current version.

◦

If the versions are different, download the firmware upgrade and update the
firmware on the product following the instructions onscreen.
NOTE: The product must be connected to a computer with internet access to
upgrade firmware.

◦
4.

Resend the fax.

Verify that the fax was set up when the product software was installed.
From the computer, in the HP program folder, run the Fax Setup Utility.

ENWW

Verify that the telephone service supports analog fax.
●

If using ISDN or digital PBX, contact your service provider for information about configuring
to an analog fax line.

●

If using a VoIP service, change the Fax Speed setting to Slow(V.29) or disable Fast(V.34)
from the control panel. Ask if your service provider supports fax and for the recommended
fax modem speed. Some companies might require an adapter.

●

If using a DSL service, ensure that a filter is included on the phone line connection to the
product. Contact the DSL service provider or purchase a DSL filter if you do not have one. If a
DSL filter is installed, try another since these filters can be defective.

If the error persists, find more detailed problem-solving solutions in the sections that follow this one.

Solve fax problems

205

Troubleshoot fax codes and trace reports
View and interpret fax error codes
Use fax error codes from the fax activity log to solve problems with the product fax features.
Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes
Error code

Description

Solution

200

The fax session has completed without errors.

N/A

221

User has touched the Cancel
button, causing
the fax session to be prematurely halted.

Have the sender resend the fax.

222

The receiving product has answered a call but has
been unable to detect the presence of a calling fax
product for one of the following reasons:

Confirm that the sender is a fax product and
not a voice caller—typically you must rely on
the sender informing the caller that the fax
session is failing.

If the sending product ends the call just as the
receiving product starts reception, reduce the
ring count after which the receiving product
answers. Alternatively suggest that the sender
manually dials to the receiving product and
then manually starts the fax session, by
touching theStart Fax button once fax tones
have been heard from the receiving product.

Confirm that the sender is not inadvertently
attempting to poll transmit from the receiving
product, instead of transmitting to the
receiving product.

Reconfigure the receiving fax product to use
different configuration settings, toggle the
ECM state, and/or select a slower reception
speed.

The receiving product has been unable to receive
an entire page even after multiple attempts to rereceive the parts of the page that contain errors.
This is usually due to extremely poor line
conditions.

Reattempt the fax reception at a different time
when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the error persists, disable ECM. Errors may
still occur, and may result in degraded image
quality on the received page. However, the
ability to receive the entire document will be
improved.

224

The receiving product has received one or more
pages with excessive errors. This is usually due to
extremely poor line conditions. Error correction is
not used during this session so errors are not
corrected.

Reattempt the fax reception at a different time
when telephone line conditions have improved.

225

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
sending diagnostic session with this product even
though sending diagnostic access is disabled.

Enable the sending diagnostics capability on the
receiving product.

●

The sender canceled the fax transmission by
button immediately
touching the Cancel
prior to, or just as the receiving product
answered the call.

●

The sending product automatically ended the
call immediately prior to, or just as the
receiving product answered the call.

●

223 (ECM error)

206

Typically this will be due to the receiving fax
product answering a voice call.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

The sending (sending) fax product determined
there was a feature incompatibility between
the two and disconnected immediately before
transmitting any further fax tones or T.30
frames. (This is very rare.)

ENWW

Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

226

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
sending diagnostic session with this product but the
sending diagnostic versions supported by the two
products are incompatible.

None. Sending diagnostics cannot occur between
products with incompatible sending versions.

227

The sending product has attempted to initiate a fax
session at a speed and modulation that is not
supported by the receiving product.

Reconfigure the receiving product to receive at a
slower speed.

228

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
poll transmission from the receiving product even
though the receiving product is not configured for
poll transmission.

Confirm that polling by the sender is desired.
It is possible that the sender has inadvertently
attempted to poll. If this is the case reattempt
a normal transmission from the sending
product.

If polling by the remote user was desired,
confirm that the receiving product was
correctly configured for poll transmission.

229

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
secure poll transmission from the receiving product
but has not provided a valid password.

If the sender is the desired recipient for the polled
document, confirm that the sender has the correct
password, and that the receiving product is
configured with the same password.

230

The sending product has attempted to initiate an
operation that requires error correction but has not
selected error correction for the session.

Enable ECM on both the receiving product and the
sending product.

231

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
transmission to the receiving product even though
the capability to receive is disabled at the
receiving product.

Ensure that the receiving product is capable of
receiving a document. Check that paper is
correctly loaded, paper is not jammed within the
product, and any other system abnormalities have
been cleared.

232

One of the following has occurred:

233 and 234

●

235 and 236 (ECM
error)

A communication failure has occurred
between the two products.

Re-attempt the fax reception at a different time
when telephone line conditions have
improved.

●

The user at the remote product may have
button.
touched the Cancel

If the error persists, and error correction is in
use for the fax session, disable ECM.

●

The power at the remote product has been
interrupted or deliberately turned off, causing
the fax session to be interrupted.

237

238
239–241
242

ENWW

The sending fax product sent an unexpected
communication. This is a defect in the sending
product.

N/A

The sending fax product is attempting to receive
instead of send. Both products have attempted to
start a reception at the same time. It is possible to
accidentally initiate a fax reception after dialing on
many products, if there is no paper in the product
or if the paper is not correctly loaded and cannot
be sensed by the appropriate document sensor.

Ensure that a document is ready and correctly
loaded in the sending fax product and that the
sending product is attempting to initiate a
transmission and not a reception.

Solve fax problems

207

Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

243 and 244

One of the following has occurred:

Confirm that the sender is not inadvertently
attempting to poll transmit from the receiving
product, instead of transmitting to the
receiving product. This mode of operation
must be specially configured on the receiving
product. If poll transmission from the receiving
product is the desired mode of operation,
confirm that the receiving product has been
configured for this operation.

Reconfigure the receiving fax product to use
different configuration settings, toggle the
ECM state, and/or select a slower reception
speed.

The user of the sending product has touched the
button, causing the session to be
Cancel
prematurely terminated. The receiving product has
been "holding off" the remote product during
reception of a large and/or complex document
due to lack of available memory. This hold-off time
has exceeded the timeout (typically 60 seconds)
used by the sending product, and it has terminated
the session.

If the document was large, ask the sender to
retransmit the document as two or more
smaller documents.

Disable ECM and reattempt the fax reception.

247-251

The sending product appears to be "stuck on."

N/A

252

Telephone line conditions were too poor to receive
a fax.

Reattempt the fax reception at a later time
when line conditions may have improved.

Configure the receiving product to start
reception at a lower speed.

If the receiving product received successfully
several pages of a larger document, ask the
sender to transmit the document in several
smaller parts.

245 and 246 (ECM
error)

253

208

●

The user of the remote product has touched
button, causing the session to
the Cancel
be prematurely terminated.

●

The sending fax product determined there
was a feature incompatibility between the two
products and has terminated the session. An
example would be when the receiving
product wanted to initiate polling, but the
sending product did not support this mode of
operation.

The sending product has attempted to initiate a
page transmission using a page width that is not
supported by the receiving product.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Ask the sender to reconfigure the fax product to
transmit using a "normal" (letter/A4) page width.

ENWW

Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes (continued)

ENWW

Error code

Description

Solution

281

The receiving product has not received any data at
the start of a page during non-ECM reception,
although the modem has not detected a sending
disconnect. The sending product is probably
transmitting fill bytes instead of data and has either
jammed or broken.

Reattempt the fax reception after first requesting
that the sender check the sending product.

282

The receiving product has not received any data at
the start of a page during ECM reception although
the modem has not detected a sending disconnect.
The sending product is probably transmitting sync
frames instead of data and has either jammed or
broken.

283

The receiving product has detected that the modem
carrier has stopped. Either the line has been
disconnected or the sending product has aborted
the transmission.

284

The receiving product has not received any data
during non-ECM page reception and a timeout
failure has occurred. The sending product is
probably transmitting fill bytes instead of data and
has either jammed or broken.

285

The receiving product has stopped receiving any
data during an ECM page reception although the
modem has not detected a sending disconnect. The
sending product is probably transmitting sync
frames instead of data and has either jammed or
broken.

286

The sending product has transmitted invalid data.
The receiving product has received frames with
errors during an ECM reception and requested
retransmission of the errored frames. The data that
is resent does not correspond to the data that was
requested. This is an implementation error from the
sending product.

Disable ECM and reattempt the reception.

290

The sending product has attempted to renegotiate
the session mode from ECM to non-ECM between
pages. This operation is not supported and the
session has been abandoned.

Reattempt the fax reception and split the document
into two portions corresponding to the ECM and
non-ECM portions. Some products will attempt to
use non-ECM for photo mode, so this may be
associated with a between-page encoding change
to support photo mode.

Solve fax problems

209

Table 6-4 Fax receive error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

291

This is not a communication error and it is not
expected that this error will occur under nondevelopment scenarios. Reception has failed
because the receiving product is unable to open a
file to receive data into. May be associated with
low memory, although low memory should be
handle more gracefully than this.

If the error persists, reinitialize the product.

292

The sending product has attempted to renegotiate
the encoding mode from non-JPEG to JPEG. This
operation is not supported and the session has
been abandoned.

Reattempt the fax reception and split the document
into two portions corresponding to the JPEG and
non-JPEG portions. Some products will attempt to
use JPEG for photo mode, so this may be
associated with a between-page encoding change
to support photo mode.

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes

210

Error code

Description

Solution

300

Fax session has completed without errors

N/A

311

The user of the receiving product has touched the
Cancel
button, causing the session to be
prematurely halted before all pages have been
transmitted.

Resend the fax.

312

A sending fax product has failed to answer the
call. Specifically fax tones or the fax handshake
from a sending product has not been detected.
Typically this is due to the user calling the wrong
number, the correct number has been called but
the product has been configured not to answer, or
the sending product has temporarily disabled
answering due to a condition such as lack of
paper or a paper jam.

Confirm the sending fax product is ready to
receive a document and reattempt the
transmission.

313

A busy signal has been detected each time the
receiving product has attempted to call the sending
product.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a later time when
the line is no longer busy.

314

The receiving product has attempted to initiate a
sending diagnostic session but has detected that
sending diagnostics are disabled at the sending
product.

Enable sending diagnostics on the sending
product.

315

The receiving product has attempted to initiate a
sending diagnostic session but has detected that
the sending diagnostic version supported by the
sending product is incompatible.

No solution. Sending diagnostics cannot occur
between products with incompatible sending
versions.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

316

The receiving product is setup to initiate document
transmission, but it has detected that the sending
product is not able to receive a document. This
error should be very rare since normally a sending
product will not answer if it cannot receive a
document. On of the few exceptions to this would
occur if the sending product was configured to poll
transmit a document but was unable to receive.

Configure the sending product for reception.
Typically the sender should ensure paper is loaded
in the product, paper jams are fixed, and any
other system abnormalities are cleared.

317

The sending product cannot support a fax
reception at any speed or modulation that is
supported by the receiving product.

N/A

318

The sending product cannot support a fax
reception at the page width selected by the
receiving product.

N/A

319

The receiving product has attempted to initiate a
binary file transfer (BFT) but has detected that the
sending product does not support this mode of
operation.

Do one of the following:

320

ENWW

The receiving product is set up to initiate poll
reception with a sending product, but it has
detected that the sending product is not configured
to do this. Poll transmission from a sending product
is typically configured on a session-by-session
basis.

●

Enable the BFT capability on the sending
product if it is supported.

●

Retransmit the document as a normal fax,
rather than attempting a BFT transfer.

Do one of the following:
●

Confirm that the receiver really wants to
attempt a poll reception. If not, reconfigure
the receiving product for a normal fax
transmission

●

Configure the sending product for poll
transmission. The sender must load a
document to transmit and then configure the
product for polling.

321

There was a communication error with the
receiving fax product due to poor telephone line
conditions.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different time
when telephone line conditions have improved.

322–324

Telephone line conditions were too poor to send a
fax.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the session fails after transmitting several
pages of a large document, retransmit the
document as several smaller documents.

Solve fax problems

211

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

325-328 (ECM
error)

Telephone line conditions were very poor.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the error persists, disable ECM. Errors may
still occur, and may result in a degraded
image quality on the received page.
However, the ability to transmit the entire
document will be improved.

The sending product has reported that one or more
pages have been received (non-ECM mode) with
excessive errors. This error does not result in the
session being terminated immediately. Subsequent
page transmission can still occur and later pages
may be received without error.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the error persists, select a lower speed for
the initial transmission speed.

There is a defect in the sending fax product.

Send from another product.

344–348

One of the following has occurred:

349-353 (ECM
error)

●

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

fax session was using error correction,
disable ECM.

Configure the sending product for document
reception by clearing any paper jams,
loading sufficient paper, and clearing any
other system errors.

Configure the receiving fax product to use
different configurations, toggle the ECM state,
or select a slower reception speed.

329–331

332–337
338–342 (ECM
error)
343

354 and 355

The sending product has failed to respond to
a fax command from the receiving product
due to the connection being interrupted.
button

●

The sender has touched the Cancel
while the reception was in progress.

●

In rare conditions, incompatibility between
the two products may cause the sending
product to abandon the call.

356-361

One of the following has occurred:

362-366 (ECM
error)

●

The sender has touched the Cancel
causing the session to be aborted.

●

The sending product has encountered a
system problem such as no paper or a paper
jam, which has inhibited it from receiving any
more pages, and which has caused it to
terminate the session prematurely.

●

A feature incompatibility has been
encountered by the sending product, causing
it to terminate the session.

367-372

button,

The sending product appears to be "stuck on".

N/A

373-377 (ECM
error)
378 and 379

212

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

380

The sending product has failed to issue a valid
response to a CTC frame. This occurs during ECM
transmission after multiple retransmissions of erred
data.

Send from another product.

381

One of the following has occurred:

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the error persists, disable ECM.

The sending fax product has been "holding off" the
receiving fax product from continuing the ongoing
transmission due to a temporary low memory
condition at the sending product. If this "hold-off"
period exceeds a product's specific timeout value,
the session will terminate.

Resend the document as two or more
separate fax transmissions. Wait several
minutes between the end of one transmission
and the start of the next transmission.

If the error persists, disable ECM.

One of the following has occurred:

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

If the error persists, disable ECM.

●

382

383

●

384

ENWW

The sending product has failed to respond to
a fax command from the receiving product
due to the connection being interrupted.
The sender has touched the Cancel
while the reception was in progress.

button

The sending product has failed to respond to
a fax command from the receiving product
due to the connection being interrupted
The sender has touched the Cancel
while the reception was in progress.

button

The receiving product has attempted a black JPEG
transmission to a product that does not support this
mode.

Reattempt the fax transmission using a different
mode.

Solve fax problems

213

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)

214

Error code

Description

Solution

386

The receiving product has failed to complete the
third phase of the initial V.34 handshake after
originating a fax session. This is usually due to
poor line conditions although it may be a
compatibility issue with certain products and/or
line conditions.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different
time when telephone line conditions have
improved.

Disable V.34 on the receiving product and
attempt the transmission using the V.17
mode.

387

The receiving product has failed to successfully
negotiate the initial V.8 handshake with the
sending product after originating a fax session.
Typically this will occur when the sending product
is not fax capable or has disabled reception. It
may also be a compatibility issue with certain
products and/or line conditions.

388

The receiving product has originated a fax session
and detected a sending fax product but has been
unable to detect any T30 frames. If the product is
in V.17 mode it is likely that the connection has
been interrupted. In V.34 mode is also possible for
this error to occur due to compatibility problems
with certain products and/or line conditions.

389

The receiving product has originated a fax session
and has reattempted V.8 negotiations multiple
times without success.

390

The receiving product has originated a fax session
using error correction (either V.34 or V.17).
Transmission of an image has been abandoned
after a timeout when no data has become ready
for transmission. This is most likely due to a low
memory condition although it could be due to other
internal problems that cause generation of data for
transmission to stall.

391

The receiving product has originated a fax session
without error correction (not V.34 ). Transmission
of an image has been abandoned after a timeout
when no data has become ready for transmission.
This is most likely due to a low memory condition
although it could be due to other internal problems
that cause generation of data for transmission to
stall.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

Reattempt the transmission after making sure
documents stored in memory are printed and the
product has paper ready for printing. If the
problem persists reinitialize permanent storage.

ENWW

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)

ENWW

Error code

Description

Solution

392

The receiving product has answered a fax session
and completed the initial V.34 handshake but has
been to detect any T30 frames. This failure is either
a compatibility problems with certain products or is
due to line conditions.

Reattempt the fax reception at a different time
when telephone line conditions have
improved.

Disable V.34 on the receiving product and
attempt the transmission using the V.17
mode.

Reattempt the fax reception. If transmission
errors are not encountered because line
conditions have improved, then this error will
probably be avoided.

Disable V.34 on the receiving product and
attempt the transmission using the V.17
mode.

393

The receiving product has failed to complete the
third phase of the initial V.34 handshake after
answering a fax session. This is usually due to
poor line conditions although it may be a
compatibility issue with certain products and/or
line conditions.

394

The receiving product has failed to successfully
negotiate the initial V.8 handshake with the
sending product after answering a fax session.
Typically this will occur when the calling product is
not fax capable. It may also be a compatibility
issue with certain products and/or line conditions.

395

An unexpected T.30 frame has been received
between pages during a multipage V.34
reception. This is almost certainly a compatibility
problem with the sending product and may be due
to an error with the implementation of the sending
product.

Solve fax problems

215

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)

216

Error code

Description

Solution

396–409

An error occurred during a V.34 transmission
when the receiving product was unable to correctly
handshake with the sending product and was
consequently unable to transmit a T30 frame. This
occurs when the line was disconnected or if line
conditions degrade during the session.

Reattempt the fax transmission at a different time
when telephone line conditions have improved.

410–419

An error occurred during a V.34 reception when
the receiving product was unable to correctly
handshake with the sending product and was
consequently unable to transmit a T30 frame. This
occurs when the line is disconnected or if line
conditions degrade during the session.

420

V.34 negotiations have failed from the originating
product during phase four, which occurs after V.8
and before the first T.30 frames are exchanged.
Compatibility problems have been observed in this
area when sending to non-HP units.

421

V.34 negotiations have failed from the originating
product during phase three, which occurs after V.
8, before phase four, and before the first T.30
frames are exchanged. Compatibility problems
have been observed in this area when sending to
non-HP units.

422

V.34 negotiations have failed from the answering
product during phase four, which occurs after V.8
and before the first T.30 frames are exchanged.

423

V.34 negotiations have failed from the answering
product during phase three, which occurs after V.
8, before phase4, and before the first T.30 frames
are exchanged.

430

The transmitting product is unable to send
continuous ones at the end of the control channel
prior to starting the primary channel. This is a V.34
error. This error may be associated with line
conditions although it is more likely to be due to
internal problems with the modem.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Table 6-5 Fax send error codes (continued)
Error code

Description

Solution

431

The transmitting product has not received a
response after aborting a transmission. Depending
upon when the session is aborted, some sending
products may not respond. It should be noted that
the receiving unit always attempts to abort the
session in a way that allows the sending product to
respond to the final PPS_EOP.

N/A

440–445

An error occurred during a V.34 transmission after
one or more partial pages (image data) were
transmitted using the primary channel. The
transmitting product was unable to restart the
control channel in order to resume the T30
handshake. This typically occurs when the
receiving product prematurely disconnects during
partial page reception, although it is possible it
may also be due to compatibility issues.

Reattempt the fax reception at a different time
when telephone line conditions have improved.

Fax trace report
A fax T.30 trace report has information that can help resolve fax transmission problems. If you call HP
for help in resolving these problems, print a T.30 trace report before you call.
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Service menu.

Touch the Fax Service menu.

Touch the Print T.30 Trace button, and then touch the Now button.

button.

Fax logs and reports
Use the following instructions to print fax logs and reports:

Print all fax reports
Use this procedure to print all of the following reports at one time:

ENWW

●

Last Call Report

●

Fax Activity Log

●

Phone Book Report

●

Junk Fax List

●

Billing Report (when Billing Codes are turned on)

●

Configuration Report

●

Usage Page

Solve fax problems

217

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

Touch the Fax Menu button.

Touch the Fax Reports button.

Touch the Print All fax Reports button.

218

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Print individual fax reports
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

Touch the Fax Menu button.

Touch the Fax Reports button.

Touch the name of the report that you want to print.

Set the fax error report
A fax error report is a brief report that indicates the product experienced a fax job error. You can set it
to print after the following events:
●

Every fax error (the factory-set default)

●

Send fax error

●

Receive fax error

●

Never
NOTE: With this option, you will have no indication that a fax failed to be transmitted unless
you print a fax activity log.

From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.

Touch the Fax Menu button.

Touch the Fax Reports button.

Touch the Fax Error Report button, and then touch the printing option that you want to use.

Change error correction and fax speed
Set the fax-error-correction mode
Usually, the product monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a fax. If
the product detects an error during the transmission and the error-correction setting is On, the product
can request that the portion of the fax be resent. The factory-set default for error correction is On.
You should turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax, and you
are willing to accept the errors in the transmission. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are
trying to send a fax overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone
connection.

ENWW

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Service menu.

Touch the Fax Service menu.

Touch the Error Correction button, and then touch the On button.

button.

Solve fax problems

219

Change the fax speed
The fax-speed setting is the modem protocol that the product uses to send faxes. It is the worldwide
standard for full-duplex modems that send and receive data across telephone lines at up to 33,600 bits
per second (bps). The factory-set default for the fax-speed setting is Fast(V.34).
You should change the setting only if you are having trouble sending a fax to or receiving a fax from a
particular device. Decreasing the fax speed might be useful when you are trying to send a fax
overseas, or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Touch the Fax Setup menu.

Touch the Advanced Setup menu.

Scroll to and touch the Fax Speed button, and then touch the speed setting that you want to use.

button.

Solve problems sending faxes
●

An error message displays on the control panel

●

The control panel displays a Ready message with no attempt to send the fax

●

The control panel displays the message "Storing page 1" and does not progress beyond that
message

●

Faxes can be received, but not sent

●

Unable to use fax functions from the control panel

●

Unable to use speed dials

●

Unable to use group dials

●

Receive a recorded error message from the phone company when trying to send a fax

●

Unable to send a fax when a phone is connected to the product

An error message displays on the control panel
The Communication error. message appears

220

●

Allow the product to retry sending the fax. Re-sending temporarily reduces the fax speed.

●

Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a call. Plug
the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.

●

Try a different phone cord.

●

From the control panel, change the Fax Speed option to the Medium(V.17) setting or Slow(V.29)
setting.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

button.

ENWW

●

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Speed menu.

Select the correct setting.

Turn off the Error Correction option.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Open the Error Correction menu.

Select the Off setting.

button.

NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction option can reduce image quality.
●

If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1410series or the support flyer that
came in the product box.

No dial tone.
●

Make sure that the telephone cord is plugged into the correct port on the product.

●

Make sure that the telephone cord from the product is plugged directly into the wall telephone
jack.

●

Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.

●

Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice
call.

●

Unplug the telephone cord from both the product and the wall and replug the cord.

●

Make sure that you are using the telephone cord that came with the product.

●

Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.

●

Check the phone line by using the Run Fax Test option from the Service menu on the control panel.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Select the Run Fax Test item.

button.

The Fax is busy. message appears

ENWW

●

Try sending the fax again.

●

Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.

●

Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.

Solve fax problems

221

●

Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.

●

Make sure that the phone is working by disconnecting the product, plugging in a telephone to the
phone line, and making a voice call.

●

Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line, and try sending the fax again.

●

Try a different phone cord.

●

Send the fax at a later time.

●

If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1410series or the support flyer that
came in the product box.

The No fax answer. message appears
●

Try to resend the fax.

●

Call the recipient to ensure that the fax machine is on and ready.

●

Check that you are dialing the correct fax number.

●

Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a voice
call.

●

Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.

●

Try a different phone cord.

●

Make sure that the phone cord from the wall telephone jack is plugged into the line

●

Check the phone line by using the Run Fax Test option from the Service menu on the control panel.

●

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Select the Run Fax Test item.

port.

button.

If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1410series or the support flyer that
came in the product box.

Document feeder paper jam

222

●

Verify that the paper meets product size requirements. The product does not support pages longer
than 381 mm (15 in) for faxing.

●

Copy or print the original to letter, A4, or legal size paper, and then resend the fax.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

The Fax storage is full. message appears
●

Turn the product off then on.

●

Print stored faxes that have not been printed.

●

Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.

Open the Receive Options menu.

Select the Print Private Faxes item.

Provide the password when the product prompts you.

Delete stored faxes from memory.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Select the Clear Saved Faxes item.

button.

Divide the large fax job into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.

Scanner error
●

Verify that the paper meets product size requirements. The product does not support pages longer
than 381 mm (15 in) for faxing.

●

Copy or print the original onto letter, A4, or legal size paper and then resend the fax.

The control panel displays a Ready message with no attempt to send the fax
●

ENWW

Check the fax activity log for errors.
a.

Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.

Open the Fax Reports menu.

Open the Fax Activity Log menu.

Select the Print Log Now option.

●

If a phone is connected to the product, make sure that the phone is hung up.

●

Disconnect all other lines between the fax and the product.

●

Connect the product directly into the wall telephone jack and resend the fax.

Solve fax problems

223

The control panel displays the message "Storing page 1" and does not
progress beyond that message
●

Delete stored faxes from memory.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Select the Clear Saved Faxes item.

button.

Faxes can be received, but not sent
Send fax and nothing happens.
1.

Check for a dial tone on the phone line by using the Start Fax button.

Turn the product off then on.

Use the control panel or the HP Fax Setup Wizard to configure the fax time, date, and fax header
information.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Fax Header menu.

Enter the correct settings.

button.

Verify that any extension phones on the line are hung up.

If using a DSL service, make sure that the phone line connection to the product includes a highpass filter.

Unable to use fax functions from the control panel

224

●

The product might be password protected. Use the HP Embedded Web Server, HP Toolbox
software, or the control panel to set a password.

●

If you do not know the password for the product, contact your system administrator.

●

Verify with the system administrator that the fax functionality has not been disabled.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Unable to use speed dials
●

Make sure that the fax number is valid.

●

If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed
dial number.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Dial Prefix menu.

Select the On setting.

button.

Unable to use group dials
●

Make sure that the fax number is valid.

●

If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed
dial number.

●

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Dial Prefix menu.

Select the On setting.

button.

Set up all entries in the group with speed dial entries.
a.

Open an unused speed dial entry.

Enter the fax number for the speed dial.

Touch the OK button to save the speed dial.

Receive a recorded error message from the phone company when trying to
send a fax

ENWW

●

Make sure you dial the fax number correctly, and make sure that the phone service is not blocked.
For example, some phone services might prevent long distance calling.

●

If an outside line requires a prefix, turn on the Dial Prefix option or include the prefix in the speed
dial number.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

button.

Solve fax problems

225

Open the Dial Prefix menu.

Select the On setting.

NOTE: To send a fax without a prefix, when the Dial Prefix option is turned on, send the fax
manually.
●

Send a fax to an international number
a.

If a prefix is required, manually dial the telephone number with the prefix.

Enter the country/region code before dialing the phone number.

Wait for pauses as you hear the tones on the phone.

Send the fax manually from the control panel.

Unable to send a fax when a phone is connected to the product

226

●

Make sure that the telephone is hung up.

●

Make sure that the telephone is not being used for a voice call when faxing.

●

Unplug the phone from the line, and then try sending the fax.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Solve problems receiving faxes
●

The fax does not respond

●

An error message displays on the control panel

●

A fax is received but does not print

●

Sender receives a busy signal

●

No dial tone

●

Cannot send or receive a fax on a PBX line

The fax does not respond
The fax has a dedicated phone line
●

Set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting from the control panel.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the Automatic setting.

button.

An answering machine is connected to the product
●

Set the Answer Mode option to the TAM setting and plug the answering machine into the
“telephone” port.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the TAM setting.

button.

If the TAM setting is unavailable, set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting.
●

ENWW

Set the Rings to Answer setting to at least one ring more than the number of rings for which the
answering machine is set.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

button.

Solve fax problems

227

Open the Rings to Answer menu.

Select the correct setting.

●

Plug the answering machine into the “telephone” port.

●

If the product has a telephone handset connected, set the Answer Mode option to the Fax/Tel
setting to route calls to the correct device. When detecting a voice call, the product generates a
ring tone that alerts you to pick up the telephone handset.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the Fax/Tel setting.

button.

A telephone handset is connected to the product
Set the Answer Mode option to the Automatic setting.
1.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the Automatic setting.

button.

The Answer Mode setting is set to the Manual setting
●

Touch the Start Fax button on the control panel.

Voice mail is available on the fax line
●

228

Add a distinctive ring service to your telephone line and change the Distinctive Ring setting on the
product to match the ring pattern supplied by the telephone company. Contact your telephone
company for information.
a.

Verify that the answer mode is set to the Automatic setting.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

button.

ENWW

Open the Distinctive Ring menu.

Select the correct setting.

●

Buy a dedicated line for faxing.

●

Set the Answer Mode option to the Manual setting.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the Manual setting.

button.

NOTE: You must be present to receive faxes.
The product is connected to a DSL phone service
●

Check the installation and features. A DSL modem requires a high-pass filter on the phone line
connection to the product. Contact your DSL service provider for a filter or buy a filter.

●

Verify that the filter is plugged in.

●

Replace the existing filter to make sure that it is not defective.

The product uses a fax over IP or VoIP phone service
●

●

Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow(V.29) or Medium(V.17) setting, or disable the Fast(V.34)
setting.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Speed menu.

Select the correct setting.

button.

Contact your service provider to make sure that fax is supported and for a recommended fax
speed settings. Some companies might require an adapter.

An error message displays on the control panel
The No fax detected. message appears
NOTE: This error does not always refer to a missed fax. If a voice call is made to a fax number by
mistake and the caller hangs up, the No fax detected. message appears on the control panel.

ENWW

●

Ask the sender to resend the fax.

●

Make sure that the telephone cord from the product is plugged into the wall telephone jack.

Solve fax problems

229

●

Try a different phone cord.

●

Plug the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.

●

Make sure the telephone line and phone wall jack are active by plugging in a telephone and
checking for a dial tone.

●

Make sure that the telephone cord is plugged into the “line” port on the product.

●

Check the phone line by running a fax test from the control panel.

●

If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1410series or the support flyer that
came in the product box.

The Communication error. message appears
●

Ask the sender to send the fax again or send at a later time when line conditions have improved.

●

Unplug the product telephone cord from the wall, plug in a telephone, and try making a call. Plug
the product phone cord into a jack for another phone line.

●

Try a different phone cord.

●

Set the Fax Speed option to the Slow(V.29) or Medium(V.17) setting, or disable the Fast(V.34)
setting.

●

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Speed menu.

Select the correct setting.

button.

Turn off the Error Correction feature to prevent automatic error correction.
NOTE: Turning off the Error Correction feature can reduce image quality.

●

230

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Open the Error Correction menu.

Select the Off setting.

button.

Print the Fax Activity Log report from the control panel to determine if the error occurs with a
specific fax number.
a.

Touch the Fax button, and then touch the Fax Menu button.

Open the Fax Reports menu.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

●

Open the Fax Activity Log menu.

Select the Print Log Now option.

If the error persists, contact HP. See www.hp.com/support/CM1410series or the support flyer that
came in the product box.

The Fax storage is full. message appears
●

Turn the product off then on.

●

Print all of the faxes, and then have the sender resend the fax.

●

Ask the sender to divide a large fax job into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.

●

Make sure that the resolution of the sending fax machine is not set to the Photo setting or the
Superfine setting.

●

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Resolution menu.

Select the correct setting.

button.

Cancel all fax jobs or clear the faxes from memory.

The Fax is busy. message appears
●

The product cannot receive a fax while attempting to send one. Cancel the fax send and try
sending at a later time.

●

Allow the product to try sending the fax again.

A fax is received but does not print
The Private Receive feature is on
●

When the Private Receive feature is activated, received faxes are stored in memory. A password is
required to print the stored faxes.

●

Enter the password to print the fax. If you do not know the password, contact the product
administrator.

NOTE: Memory errors might occur if the faxes are not printed. The product will not answer if the
memory is full.

ENWW

Solve fax problems

231

Sender receives a busy signal
A handset is connected to the product
●

Make sure the phone is hung up.

●

Change the Answer Mode option to match the product setup.
a.

From the Home screen, touch the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Basic Setup menu.

Open the Answer Mode menu.

Select the setting that matches the product setup.

button.

Set the Answer Mode option to the Fax/Tel setting to automatically receive faxes. The Fax/
Tel setting automatically detects whether the incoming transmission is a fax or a voice call
and routes the call to the appropriate device.
A phone line splitter is being used
●

If you are using a phone line splitter, remove the splitter and set up the phone as a downstream
phone.

●

Make sure the phone is hung up.

●

Make sure the phone is not being used for a voice call when faxing.

No dial tone
●

If using a phone line splitter, remove the phone line splitter and set up the phone as a downstream
phone.

Cannot send or receive a fax on a PBX line
●

232

If you are using a PBX phone line, contact your PBX administrator to configure an analog fax line
for your product.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Solve general fax problems
●

Faxes are sending slowly

●

Fax quality is poor

●

Fax cuts off or prints on two pages

Faxes are sending slowly
The product is experiencing poor phone line quality.
●

Retry sending the fax when the line conditions have improved.

●

Check with the phone service provider that the line supports fax.

●

Turn off the Error Correction setting.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Open the Error Correction menu.

Select the Off setting.

menu.

NOTE: This can reduce image quality.

ENWW

●

Use white paper for the original. Do not use colors such as gray, yellow, or pink.

●

Increase the Fax Speed setting.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Speed menu.

Select the correct setting.

menu.

●

Divide large fax jobs into smaller sections, and then fax them individually.

●

Change the fax settings on the control panel to a lower resolution.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Resolution menu.

Select the correct setting.

menu.

Solve fax problems

233

Fax quality is poor
Fax is blurry or light.
●

Increase fax resolution when sending faxes. Resolution does not affect received faxes.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Open the Fax Resolution menu.

Select the correct setting.

menu.

NOTE: Increasing resolution slows transmission speed.
●

Turn on the Error Correction setting from the control panel.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Service menu.

Open the Fax Service menu.

Open the Error Correction menu.

Select the On setting.

menu.

●

Check the print cartridges and replace if necessary.

●

Ask the sender to darken the contrast setting on the sending fax machine, and then resend the fax.

Fax cuts off or prints on two pages
●

234

Set the Default Paper Size setting. Faxes print on a single size of paper based on the Default
Paper Size settings.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the System Setup menu.

Open the Paper Setup menu.

Open the Default Paper Size menu.

Select the correct setting.

menu.

●

Set the paper type and size for the tray used for faxes.

●

Turn on the Fit to Page setting to print longer length faxes on letter or A4 size paper.
a.

Open the Setup

Open the Fax Setup menu.

Open the Advanced Setup menu.

Chapter 6 Solve problems

menu.

ENWW

Open the Fit to Page menu.

Select the On setting.

NOTE: If the Fit to Page setting is off and the Default Paper Size setting is set to letter, a legal size
original prints on two pages.

Product updates
Software and firmware updates and installation instructions for this product are available at
www.hp.com/support/CM1410series. Click Downloads and drivers, click the operating system,
and then select the download for the product.

ENWW

Product updates

235

236

Chapter 6 Solve problems

ENWW

Engineering Details

Introduction
This chapter presents engineering detail for the following topics:

ENWW

●

Printing print-ready documents

●

Paper and print media

●

Parameter settings (fax data-store parameters)

●

Installation notes

Introduction

237

Printing print-ready documents
Several methods are available for printing documents independently of the original software program
that was used to create the document. Normally, the document is printed by opening the original
application and printing it to a file, or is printed by means of a distribution method such as internet
downloading. The following print-ready file formats can be sent directly to the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410
Color MFP Series product without first opening the original software program:
●

HP LaserJet Printer Control Language (.PRN)

●

Portable Document Format (.PDF)

●

Postscript (.PS)

●

Text (.TXT)

Use one of the following methods to send print-ready files to your product.
NOTE: The examples that are used here are for printing .PDF documents. However, any print-ready
file type can be substituted.

Print-ready file printing by using FTP through a browser
Complete the following steps to print print-ready files directly by using FTP through a browser.
NOTE: The following instructions can be used on Windows or Macintosh operating systems.
1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout.

Open a browser window.

In the address line of the browser, type ftp://. For example, if the TCP/IP address of
your product is 192.168.0.90, type the following:
FTP:// 192.168.0.90

Locate the print-ready file for the product.

Drag and drop the print-ready file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.

NOTE: If the PORT1 icon does not appear as a folder name, you might have to enable folder
viewing for FTP sites in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, use the following procedure
to enable the folder view.

238

Select Tools, then select Internet Options, and then select the Advanced tab.

Select the Enable folder view for FTP sites.

Click OK to save the setting.

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Print-ready file printing by using FTP on a direct network
connection
If the HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series uses a direct network connection, use file transfer
protocol (FTP) to print a print-ready file. Complete the following steps for the operating system:

Windows operating systems
1.

Take note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout.

Open a command window on the computer.

Type ftp . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
the following:
ftp 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for the user name, press Enter.

When prompted for the password, press Enter.

Type bin at the command prompt.

Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files
appears in the command window.

Type put , where is the name of the print-ready file to be printed,
including the path. For example, type the following:
put C:\LJ\P3010FW.PDF
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "c:\My Documents\LJ\P3010FW.PDF"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job

10. Press Enter on the keyboard.
11. The print-ready file prints.
12. At the command prompt, type bye to exit the FTP command.
13. At the command prompt, type exit to return to the Windows interface.

ENWW

Printing print-ready documents

239

Macintosh operating systems
1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout.

Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal program on the computer
in the following location:
System/Applications/Utilities/Terminal
Open the Finder, select Applications, and then click Utilities. Double-click to open the Terminal
utility.

Type FTP . For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type
the following:
FTP 192.168.0.90

Press Enter on the keyboard.

When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.

You can drag and drop the firmware file into the Terminal folder (System/Applications/Utilities/
Terminal). Alternatively, you can type put , where is the location where the printready file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type the following:
put /username/desktop/P3010FW.PDF
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type put "/user name/desktop/P3010FW.PDF"
To ensure that the entire path to the print-ready file is placed in the put command, type put and a
space, and then click and drag the print-ready file onto the terminal window. The complete path to
the file is automatically placed after the put command.

Press Enter.

The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take about
five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or computer.

The product automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.

Print-ready printing by using a local Windows port
To print directly by using a local Windows port, follow the instructions for your operating system.

240

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Windows 2000 Service Pack 3, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, or Windows Vista
The print-ready file can be sent directly to the product by typing a copy command at a command
prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1.

At a command prompt, type copy /b , where is the
name of the print-ready file (including the path) and is the name of the appropriate
printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3010FW.PDF lpt1

Press Enter on the keyboard.
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3010FW.PDF". The message
Processing Job appears on the control panel, and the job prints.

At the command prompt, type exit to close the command window.

Print-ready file printing in a Windows network
If the product is shared on a Windows network, complete the following steps.
1.

From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type copy /b \
\\, where is the name of the print-ready file
(including the path), is the name of the computer from which the product is
being shared, and is the product share name. For example, type the following:
C:\>copy /b c:\P3010FW.PDF \\your_server\sharename
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in
quotation marks. For example, type C:\>copy /b "c:\My Documents\P3010FW.PDF" \\your_server
\sharename

Press Enter on the keyboard. The message Processing Job appears on the control panel, and
the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.

Print-ready file printing in UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the print-ready file to the product is acceptable,
including the following:
●

At the command prompt, type cp , where is the location of the print-ready file.

Print-ready file printing by using the LPR command
NOTE: This direct printing method is for use in Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Vista.

ENWW

Printing print-ready documents

241

Complete the following steps to print a print-ready file by using the LPR command.
1.

Make note of the TCP/IP address on the Embedded Jetdirect page. The HP Embedded Jetdirect
page is the second page of the configuration page printout..

From a command window, type the following:
lpr -P -S -o l
or
lpr -S -Pbinps
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the product, and where
FILENAME is the file name of the print-ready file.
NOTE: The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not
the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.

242

The file prints, but no messages appear in the command prompt window.

Type exit at the command prompt to close the command window.

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Paper and print media
●

Media sources and destinations

●

Source commands

●

Media types

Media sources and destinations
The following table shows the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the product.
Table 7-1 HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series MFP Series media sources and
destinations
Media sources

Media destinations

Priority input tray

standard

Tray 1

standard

Document feeder input bin

standard

Output bin

standard

Document feeder output bin

standard

Source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string" MediaSource. See the
following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the command for Tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l1H is the command for Tray
2.
Table 7-2 Media-source commands
Media source

ENWW

PCL 6

PCL 5 UPD

PostScript

ubyte # MediaSource or
ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource1

Esc&l#H

/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false or
null

Tray 1

3 false

Auto Select

Manual feed in tray 1

3 true

For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 2.

Paper and print media

243

Media types
Media-type commands
The PCL 5 escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where "n#" is the number of
characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence "Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5
letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 7-3 Media-type commands

1
2

Esc&

Paper type

Esc&

Plain

Esc&

Preprinted

Esc&

Letterhead

Esc&

Transparency1

Esc&

Prepunched

Esc&

Labels

Esc&

Bond

Esc&

Recycled

Esc&

Color

Esc&

Cardstock2

Esc&

Rough

Esc&

Envelope

You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".

Parameter settings (fax data-store parameters)
NOTE: Refer to the service manual for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product for information about
changing the fax data-store parameters.

244

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Installation notes
●

I. INTRODUCTION

●

II. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

●

III. LATE-BREAKING INFORMATION

●

IV. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

●

V. LEGAL STATEMENTS

I. INTRODUCTION
PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT
This file provides specific installation, compatibility, and troubleshooting information. For additional
information about product and driver features, see the product user guide and the online help that is
included with each software component.

SUPPORTED OPERATING SYSTEMS
The CD that ships with your product includes software for the following operating systems:
●

Windows XP 32-bit (Service Pack 2 and higher)

●

Windows Vista 32-bit and 64-bit

●

Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit

●

Windows Server 2003 32-bit (Service Pack 3)

●

Windows Server 2008 32-bit and 64-bit

The following operating systems support the recommended software components:
●

Windows XP 32-bit (Service Pack 2 and higher)

●

Windows Vista 32-bit and 64-bit

●

Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit

The recommended software includes the following components:

ENWW

●

HP LaserJet Help and Learn Center

●

HP ToolboxFX

●

HP LaserJet PCL 6 print driver

●

HP Web Registration

●

HP Scan Application (multifunction products only)

●

HP LaserJet Send Fax Application (multifunction products only)

Installation notes

245

●

HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility (multifunction products only)

●

HP LaserJet Fax Driver (multifunction products only)

NOTE: The minimum software may be installed instead of the recommended by choosing Click here
for more install options on the Software to Install screen.
The following operating systems support only the minimum software components:
●

Windows Server 2003 32-bit (Service Pack 3)

●

Windows Server 2008 32-bit and 64-bit

The minimum software includes the following components::
●

HP LaserJet PCL 6 print driver

●

HP Scan Application (multifunction products only)

●

HP LaserJet Send Fax Application (multifunction products only)

●

HP LaserJet Fax Setup Utility (multifunction products only)

●

HP LaserJet Fax Driver (multifunction products only)

For information about Linux printer drivers, go to www.hp.com/go/linux.
For information about UNIX printer drivers, go to www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software

OVERVIEW OF THE PRINTING-SYSTEM COMPONENTS
The Windows CD-ROM has software for IBM-compatible computer systems. For more information about
a particular driver or software component, see its associated online help.
Drivers
A driver is software that allows software applications to access product features. Typically, you should
install drivers for each product. The printing-system software CD-ROM that came with your device
includes the following Windows drivers:
●

HP PCL 6 print driver for the supported operating systems listed above

●

HP WIA Scan driver that includes TWAIN compatibility.

Software Applications
●

HP ToolboxFX

●

HP LaserJet Help and Learn Center (provides access to the product user guide and troubleshooting
information)

●

Uninstaller

Additional drivers might be available from your Hewlett-Packard distributor or from online sources. See
the "Technical Assistance" section of this document or the product user guide for more information
about obtaining drivers and other HP software.

246

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

HP ToolboxFX
The printing system software includes HP ToolboxFX software. HP ToolboxFX provides product status
information such as toner and paper levels as well as pop-up alert messages when the product requires
attention. You can also use HP ToolboxFX to configure the product settings.
HP Help and Learn Center
The HP Help and Learn Center is installed with the recommended software set and provides access to
product documentation and help. To view the product documentation without installing the
recommended software, insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. When the installer screen appears,
click the documentation button on the left side of the screen.
Uninstaller
The Uninstaller allows you to remove Windows HP printing system components. See the "Uninstaller"
section for instructions

II. INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
The CD-ROM setup or installation software detects the version and language of the operating system
that you are running.

INSTALLING SOFTWARE
NOTE: Administrator privileges are required to install the printing system.
NOTE: For USB installations DO NOT plug the USB cable into the computer and product until
instructed to do so by the software
The following methods are available for installing printer drivers and software components.
●

Install Now. This method installs the drivers and software. Recommended for most users.

●

Advanced Install Options. Provides flexibility for installing your choice of drivers and
software. Recommended for advanced users and system administrators.

INSTALLING SOFTWARE
NOTE: Connecting the product to the computer using a USB cable before installing software, also
called “Plug and Play,” is not recommended. See the installation guide for more information.
NOTE: Administrator privileges are required to install the printing system on all Windows operating
systems.

ENWW

Quit all programs.

Insert the CD-ROM.

If the HP printing-system installer program has not started after 30 seconds, complete steps 4
through 8.

Click Start and then select Computer or My Computer from the right hand Start menu

Browse to the root directory for the CD-ROM drive.

Installation notes

247

Double click the AUTORUN.EXE file.

When the main menu appears, click Install button to start the software installation.

Follow the onscreen instructions instructions to complete the software installation..

Printing-system installation from the CD or Internet download for network and USB
connections
NOTE: If you download the printing-system or driver from the Internet, you might need to first run the
EXE file(s). If SETUP.EXE does not run automatically, browse to its root location, double-click the file,
and follow the onscreen instructions.
Port selection
When the installation process is complete, you might need to assign the product to a port on your
network if you did not assign a port during setup. Perform one of the following procedures:
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2008
1.

Click Start, select Settings, select Control Panel, and then select Printers.

Select the printer that you just installed.

On the toolbar, click File.

Click Properties.

Click the Port tab to change the port information.

Windows Vista and Windows 7
1.

Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware and Sound, click
Printers or Devices and Printers.

Right-click the printer that you just installed.

Click Printer Properties.

Click the Port tab to change the port information.

Printer driver only (Add Printer) - Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server
2008

248

Close all programs.

Click Start, click Settings, click Control Panel, and then click Printers.

Click Add (a) printer.

Answer the questions in the Add Printer Wizard until you reach the screen that shows the printer
manufacturer list.

Click Have Disk.

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Browse to the printer driver location using one of the following options:
●

CD-ROM: Browse to the \DRIVERS\[OS]\[PDL] directory for your operating system on the
software CD.

●

Internet download: Browse to the folder where the Web files were downloaded and
decompressed.

Select the appropriate INF file.

Click Open, and then click OK.

Select the appropriate printer.

10. Follow the remaining onscreen instructions to complete the printer installation.
Printer driver only (Add Printer) - Windows Vista and Windows 7
1.

Close all programs.

Click Start, click Control Panel, and then click Hardware and Sound.

Under the Printers or Devices and Printers section, click Add a printer.

Select Add Local Printer and either use an existing port or create a new port.
a.

For a new port, select Standard TCP/IP.

Enter the IP Address or Host Name.

Answer the questions in the Add Printer Wizard until you reach the screen that shows the printer
manufacturer list.

Click Have Disk.

Browse to the printer driver location using one of the following options:
●

CD-ROM: Browse to the \DRIVERS\[OS]\[PDL] directory for your operating system on the
software CD.

●

Internet download: Browse to the folder where the Web files were downloaded and
decompressed.

Select the appropriate INF file.

Click Open, and then click OK.

10. Select the appropriate printer.
11. Follow the remaining onscreen instructions to complete the printer installation.

ENWW

Installation notes

249

UNINSTALLER
The uninstall utility is available if the recommended or minimum software has been installed. The
Uninstaller removes the HP printing system software components.
1.

From the Start menu, select All Programs, and then click HP. If you have more than one HP
product, choose the specific product and then click Uninstall from the program group.

Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software uninstall.

III. LATE-BREAKING INFORMATION
KNOWN ISSUES AND WORKAROUNDS
General
●

The SNMP Community Name can be set in HP ToolboxFX or the embedded Web server. If the
Community Name is changed to something other than "public", network scanning stops working.

●

Firewall software can interfere with the HP software installer. Disable the firewall before starting a
network installation or the product might not be detected.

●

Certain high-speed USB 2.0 cards ship with unsigned host controller drivers. If you have
purchased a USB 2.0 add-in card and have an unsigned driver, you might experience driver
installation problems or communication problems between the device and HP software. It is
recommended that you always use a Microsoft WHQL Certified host controller driver with your
USB hardware.

●

Functionality is limited on systems that only meet minimum system requirements. Many images and
videos require a system that meets the recommended system requirements for acceptable
performance and reliability.

●

If the product is not detected during software installation, check the following:
◦

Verify that your cable is Hi-Speed USB 2.0 compliant.

◦

Ensure that your cable is connected correctly. Remove the USB cable, look at the end of the
cable, and then match it to the pattern on the USB port. Make sure that it is not upside down.
Insert one end of the USB cable completely into the USB port on the HP product, and insert
the other end into the back of the computer.

◦

Verify that the product is turned on. The product will not be discovered by the software if the
power is off.

◦

Ensure that your USB cable is no more than 5 m (16.4 ft) in length.

◦

Verify that the USB port is enabled. Some computers ship with disabled USB ports.

Upgrading Windows
HP recommends that you uninstall HP products before upgrading to a newer supported version of
Windows. For example, when upgrading from Windows Vista to Windows 7, uninstall your HP
product using the Uninstaller program provided in the HP program group (see the Uninstaller section),

250

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

and then upgrade to the new operating system. After the operating system upgrade is complete,
reinstall your HP product using the latest software available at HP.com

IV. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
For customer support information, see the user guide or the support flyer that was in the box, or call
your local authorized HP dealer

WEB
You can also browse to the following URL(s) for online technical support:
●

HP Color LaserJet CM1410 Series technical support: www.hp.com/support/CM1410series

●

www.hp.com/go/support

HP SOFTWARE AND SUPPORT SERVICES - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
See either the user guide or the in-box flyer for additional methods of obtaining software and support
information, such as printer-driver distribution centers, other online services, fax services, and other
online support.

V. LEGAL STATEMENTS
TRADEMARK NOTICES
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and Adobe® PostScript® 3™ are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR® mark are registered U.S. marks.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows XP®, and Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of the Open Group.

SOFTWARE WARRANTY, LICENSE, AND COPYRIGHT
Warranty
See the user guide for complete warranty and support information.
License
See the user guide for complete information about HP software license terms.
Copyright
© 2010 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as
allowed under the copyright laws.

ENWW

Installation notes

251

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.

252

Chapter 7 Engineering Details

ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics
2ndary service menu 202
A
accessories, automatic
configuration 20
administrator
documentation 5
Adobe Acrobat Reader
printing PDF files without 238
viewing documentation 3
advanced setup
fax 137
alerts, setting up 125
Alternative Letterhead Mode
supported products 69
Apple Mac OS
see Macintosh OS 18
autoconfiguration, driver
support for 20
autoconfiguration, Enterprise
about 20
Windows support 21
B
bidirectional communication
about 20
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
20
bins, output
jams, clearing 178
blank or preprinted pages 75
booklet printing
Booklet Layout settings 89
C
calibrating color 130, 203
cartridges
status, viewing with HP Toolbox
FX 125
ENWW

CD
documentation 3
languages 9
Windows 7
CD-ROM
installing Macintosh printingsystem software 116
Macintosh 115
chapter separator pages 76
checklist
fax troubleshooting 204
checklists, printing 135
CHM files
viewing 3
clean
touch screen 192
cleaning
glass 190
paper path 182, 190
Color
Color Options settings 93
Color Themes settings 94
Default (sRGB) setting 94
features, print drivers 92
Neutral Gray settings 94
None 95
Photo (Adobe RGB 1998)
setting 94
Photo (sRGB) setting 94
Vivid setting 95
color
calibrating 130, 203
change default settings,
manually 93
fine-tune default settings 93
color alignment, calibrating 133,
183
color settings
adjusting 180

command-line printing, Windows
238
commands, paper
source 243
type 244
comparison, product models 1
components, software
Macintosh 112
Windows 16
configuration page 132
configuration, driver 23
connectivity
bidirectional communication
support 20
solving problems 196
constraint messages
print drivers 64
continuous export 25
contrast
print density 130
control panel
button test 203
clean touch screen 192
cleaning page, printing 190
display test 203
HP ToolboxFX system settings
131
menus 133
message types 151
messages, troubleshooting
151
settings 113
copy menu 145
copying
quality, adjusting 189
cover page, fax 37
covers
settings 75

Index

253

custom paper types
adding 74
D
data-store parameters 244
DDU
see HP Driver Deployment
Utility 24, 44
defaults
NVRAM initialization 204
defaults, restoring 203
defects, repetitive 187
density settings 130
device polling 131
Device Status screen
EWS 97
diagnostics
troubleshoot 96
direct printing
FTP, Windows 239
local port, Windows 240
LPR 241
networks, Windows 241
UNIX 241
disabling
driver features 25
disk space requirements
Macintosh 112
document feeder
jams 173
documentation
administrator 5
availability by operating
system 3
file formats 3
HP driver configuration 6
HP Jetdirect 6
HP Jetdirect Guide 6
install notes 5
languages 13
user guide 4
viewing 3
dpi (dots per inch)
faxing 137
drivers
accessory configuration 20
Automatic Configuration
setting 101
continuous export feature 25
diagnostics 26

254

Index

Enterprise AutoConfiguration
20
HP Driver Configuration Utility
User Guide 6
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 25
included 18
languages 11
lockable features 25
media-source commands 243
network configuration 23
Point-and-Print installation 59
scan 17
Update Now, bidirectional
communication 101
duplexing
supported products 106
E
e-mail
Windows programs
supported 32
e-mail alerts, setting up 125
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
about 20
Novell NetWare operating
systems supported 22
Windows operating systems
supported 21
error messages
control panel 151
event log 168
error messages, fax 220, 227
error report, fax
printing 219
error-correction setting, fax 219
escape sequences
media-source 243
media-type 244
event log 125
exporting driver parameters 25
F
factory defaults, restoring
NVRAM initialization 204
factory-set defaults, restoring 203
fax
answer mode 136
cover page 37
data-store parameters 244

error codes 206
error report, printing 219
error-correction 219
factory-set defaults, restoring
203
HP LaserJet HP Send Fax
software 36
multiple recipients, sending to
37
receive log 128
receiving, troubleshooting 206
reports 146
reports, printing all 217
ring type 137
send log 128
sending, troubleshooting 210
Setup Utility screen 35
solve general problems 233
unable to receive 227
unable to send 220
V.34 setting 220
fax menu 146
fax reports, printing 146
Fax tab, HP ToolboxFX 126
fax troubleshooting
checklist 204
file formats, supported 29
fonts
install/remove external fonts
99
Send True Type as Bitmap, print
drivers 68
supported by Windows 38
True Type, print drivers 67
Windows 40
FTP
direct printing, Windows 239
G
glass, cleaning 190
graph paper, printing 135
guides. See documentation
H
help
print drivers 64
Windows 17
Help tab, HP ToolboxFX 128
HP Driver Configuration 23

ENWW

HP Driver Deployment Utility
common problems 51
HP Driver Deployment Utility
(DDU) 24, 44
HP Driver Diagnostic Printer Check
Tool 26
HP Driver Preconfiguration
HP Driver Configuration
Editor 24
HP Web Jetadmin Driver
Configuration Plugin 24
OS and drivers supported 25
support guide 24
HP Jetdirect
documentation 6
HP Jetdirect print server
NVRAM initialization 204
HP LaserJet Send Fax program
36
HP LaserJet Utility, Macintosh
about 114
open 114
HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 25
included 18
HP PCL 6 Print Driver
features 61
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 25
included 18
settings 61
supported operating systems
18
HP PCL 6 printer driver
media supported 244
media-type commands 244
HP postscript level 3 emulation
printer driver
media supported 244
HP PS Universal Print Driver
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 25
included 18
HP PS Universal Print Driver and
PCL Universal Print Driver
supported operating systems
18
HP Scan software 29

ENWW

HP Toolbox FX
Status tab 125
HP ToolboxFX
about 125
density settings 130
Fax Setup Utility screen 35
Fax tab 126
features 16
Help tab 128
HP LaserJet Send Fax software
36
Network Settings tab 131
Print Settings tab 131
System Settings tab 129
HTM files
viewing 3
I
ICM. See Image Color
Management
Image Color Management
color graphics printing 67
enabling 67
image quality
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
repetitive image defects 187
Incompatible Print Settings
messages. See constraint
messages
information pages
configuration page 132
initialization
NVRAM 204
input trays. See trays
install notes 5
installation
component languages 12
Macintosh printing-system
software 116
options 54
Point and Print 59
pre-existing, modifying 60
system requirements for
Macintosh 112
troubleshooting Macintosh
117
Windows printing-system
software 54

J
jams
causes of 171
document feeder, clearing
173
locating 172
output bin, clearing 178
trays, clearing 175
Jetdirect Guide 6
Jetdirect print server
NVRAM initialization 204
L
languages
CD 9
driver 11
installer component 12
LEDs, troubleshooting 123
local port command line printing,
Windows 240
localized CD 9
location
setting 202
lockable features, drivers 25
logs, fax
error 219
printing all 217
Lotus Notes 32
LPR commands
printing PDF files 241
M
Macintosh
hardware requirements 112
Macintosh operating systems
CD-ROM 115
driver settings 114
HP LaserJet Utility 114
installing printing-system
software 116
removing software 118
software 114
software components 112
supported versions 112
Macintosh OS
direct printing 238
troubleshooting setup 117
manuals. See documentation
media. See paper

Index

255

memory
included 114
Macintosh requirements 112
NVRAM initialization 204
menu
control panel, access 133
copy 145
fax 146
Fax setup 136
Network config 144
Quick Forms 135
Reports 134
Service 142
System setup 139
USB 150
menu map, printing 170
messages
control panel 151
messages, constraint
print drivers 64
Microsoft Outlook 32
model
comparison 1
music paper, printing 135
N
network
configuring 144
device polling 131
Network config menu 144
Network Settings tab, HP
ToolboxFX 131
networks
direct printing 241
HP Driver Configuration 23
HP Jetdirect Guide 6
Point-and-Print installation 59
notebook paper, printing 135
Novell Netware operating systems
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 22
NVRAM initialization 204
O
OCR
file types supported 29
Windows software 17
online help
Windows 17

256

Index

operating systems
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 21
supported Macintosh versions
112
Outlook 32
output quality
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
repetitive image defects 187
P
package creation
suppress user error messages
48
pages
blank or preprinted 75
paper
adding custom types 74
Alternative Letterhead Mode
69
custom sizes 72
default settings 130
duplex binding settings, print
drivers 88
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
jams 171
orientation 91
selecting 182
settings, print drivers 70
source commands 243
source setting 72
sources and destinations 243
type commands 244
type setting 73
paper pickup problems
solving 171
paper type
changing 179
parameters, fax data-store 244
PBX ring detect 203
PCL 5 UPD media-source
commands 243
PCL 6 printer driver
media-source commands 243
PCL files, command-line printing
238
PCL settings, HP ToolboxFX 131
PDF files
command-line printing 238

LPR commands, printing 241
viewing 3
PDF files, online help 17
phone book, fax
HP ToolboxFX tab 126
Point-and-Print installation,
Windows printing-system
software 59
polling, device 131
PostScript Printer Description (PPD)
files
included 114
PostScript settings, HP ToolboxFX
131
PPDs, Macintosh
troubleshooting 117
pre-existing installation,
modifying 60
print cartridges
checking for damage 186
status, viewing with HP Toolbox
FX 125
print density settings 130
print driver
supported operating systems
18
print drivers
About tab contents 109
access 62
Advanced Printing Features
settings, print drivers 68
Advanced tab content 66
Allow Manual Duplexing
setting, Device Settings tab
101
Alternative Letterhead Mode,
Advanced tab 69
Automatic Configuration setting,
Device Settings tab 101
Automatic settings, Color tab
93
Booklet Layout settings, Finishing
tab 89
Color Options settings, Color
tab 93
Color tab contents 92
Color Themes settings, Color
tab 94
continuous export 25

ENWW

Copy Count settings, Advanced
tab 67
device services, Services tab
97
Device Settings tab content 98
Document Options setting,
Advanced tab 68
Document Options settings,
Finishing tab 85
document preview image 76,
80, 90, 95
Effects tab content 78
Factory Defaults setting, Printing
Shortcuts tab 106
Finishing tab contents 85
Flip Pages Up setting, Finishing
tab 88
Font Substitution Table settings,
Device Settings tab 99
Form to Tray Assignment setting,
Device Settings tab 98
General Everyday Printing
setting, Printing Shortcuts
tab 103
Graphic setting, Advanced
tab 67
Help system 64
ICM options, Advanced tab
67
incompatible print settings
messages 64
installable options, Device
Settings tab 100
Internet Services options,
Services tab 97
Job Separator setting, Device
Settings tab 101
Layout Options setting,
Advanced tab 69
Manual settings, Color tab 93
Neutral Grays settings, Color
tab 94
Orientation settings, Finishing
tab 91
Page Order settings, Finishing
tab 90
Pages per Sheet setting,
Finishing tab 90
Paper Options settings, Paper/
Quality tab 70

ENWW

Paper source setting, Paper/
Quality tab 72
Paper type setting, Paper/
Quality tab 73
Paper/Output settings,
Advanced tab 66
Paper/Quality tab contents 70
Print All Text as Black setting,
Advanced tab 68
Print on Both Sides settings,
Finishing tab 86
Print Optimizations setting,
Advanced tab 68
Print Quality settings, Paper/
Quality tab 76
Printer Features setting,
Advanced tab 68
Printing Preferences tab, driver
access 62
Printing Shortcuts tab contents
102
Properties tab, driver access
63
Raster Compression feature,
Advanced tab 69
Resizing Options settings, Effects
tab 79
Send True Type as Bitmap
setting, Advanced tab 68
Services tab content 96
True Type font settings,
Advanced tab 67
version numbers 18
Watermarks settings, Effects
tab 80
What's this? Help 64
print job
job separator 101
print on both sides
manually 86
supported products 106
print quality
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
improving 179
repetitive image defects 187
print quality page
interpreting 185
printing 185
Print Settings tab, HP ToolboxFX
131

print-ready files
command-line printing 238
printing by FTP 238
printing by local WIndows
port 240
printing by Windows network
241
printing in UNIX systems 241
printing with LPR command
241
printer drivers
change Macintosh settings
114
choosing 188
Macintosh 112
Macintosh settings 113
media supported 244
media-type commands 244
printing
configuration page 132
direct in a Windows network
241
direct in UNIX 241
direct using FTP 238
direct using local Windows
port 240
direct using LPR command 241
Printing Shortcuts tab
paper size options 104
paper type options 104
printing-system software
availability 7
priority, settings 113
problem-solving
control-panel messages 151
no response 193
slow response 194
product
model comparison 1
protocol settings, fax 220
PS emulation fonts 40
PS files, command-line printing
238
Q
quality
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
repetitive image defects 187

Index

257

R
Readiris software
file types supported 29
Windows 17
receiving faxes
error report, printing 219
log, HP ToolboxFX 128
receiving faxes, troubleshooting
206
regional versions, CD 9
removing Macintosh software
118
repetitive defects, troubleshooting
187
reports
configuration page 134
demo page 134
diagnostics page 134
error 168, 202
fax 146
menu map 134
network report 134
PCL 6 font list 134
PCL font list 134
print quality page 134
PS font list 134
service 202
service page 134
supplies status page 134
usage page 134
reports, fax
error 219
printing all 217
resets
NVRAM initialization 204
restoring
default settings 204
NVRAM initialization 204
restoring factory-set defaults 203
RFU. See remote firmware updates
rollers
repetitive image defects 187
RTF files
viewing 3
S
scan
methods 28
Scan Driver
using 28

258

Index

WIA 34
Windows 17
Scan software 29
scanner
glass cleaning 189, 190
scanning
HP Scan software 29
WIA driver features 34
secondary service menu 202
sending faxes
error report, printing 219
log, HP ToolboxFX 128
sending faxes, troubleshooting
210
Service menu
secondary 202
settings
continuous export 25
drivers, Macintosh 114
factory-set defaults, restoring
203
HP ToolboxFX 129
locking 25
parameters (fax data-store)
244
priority 113
Setup Wizard, fax 35
software
HP LaserJet Utility 114
Macintosh 114
settings 113
supported operating systems
112
uninstalling Macintosh 118
software CD
Windows 7
solve
fax problems 220
solve problems
fax 233
solving
direct-connect problems 196
network problems 196
walk-up USB printing
problems 195
sources, paper. See trays
Special Pages
covers 75

status
alerts, HP Toolbox FX 125
viewing with HP Toolbox FX
125
Status tab, HP Toolbox FX 125
supplies
status, viewing with HP Toolbox
FX 125
supplies status page
printing 184
System Settings tab, 129
System setup menu 139
T
text files, command-line printing
238
touch screen, clean 192
trays
Alternative Letterhead Mode
69
included 243
jams, clearing 175
media-source commands 243
media-type commands 244
settings 130
specify paper size 98
troubleshoot
diagnostics 96
HP driver Diagnostic Printer
Check Tool 26
troubleshooting
checklist 120
control panel messages 151
control-panel diagnostics 124
direct-connect problems 196
fax error-correction setting
219
faxes 204
jams 171
LED diagnostics 123
Macintosh setup 117
network problems 196
NVRAM initialization 204
paper feed problems 171
receive fax 227
receiving faxes 206
send fax 220
sending faxes 210
walk-up USB printing
problems 195

ENWW

TWAIN
driver 17
TXT files, command-line printing
238
types, media
HP ToolboxFX settings 130
types, paper
commands 244
U
uninstall
Macintosh software 118
UNIX OS
direct printing 241
print-ready printing 241
Update Now feature
steps to activate 22
USB menu 150
user guide
HP Driver Configuration 6
viewing 4

Windows OS
direct printing, FTP 238
direct printing, local port 240
direct printing, networks 241
driver versions 18
HP Driver Preconfiguration
support 25
HP PCL 6 Print Driver features
61
LPR commands 241
software CD 7
wireless
configuring 144

V
V.34 setting 220
version numbers
print drivers 18
volume
settings 139
W
Web Jetadmin
configuration plugin 24
Web sites
download software 7
Internet Services options,
Services tab 97
WIA driver 17, 34
Windows
components, software 16
drivers supported 17
software for 125
Windows operating systems
Enterprise AutoConfiguration
support 21
fonts supported 38
installation options 54
installing printing-system 54
Point-and-Print installation 59
PS emulation fonts supported
40

ENWW

Index

259

260

Index

ENWW

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Modify Date                     : 2010:10:22 08:48:10-06:00
Create Date                     : 2010:10:22 08:46:44-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:10:22 08:48:10-06:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : HP LaserJet Pro CM1410 Color MFP Series Software Technical Reference - ENWW
Creator                         : HP LaserJet Information Engineering
Subject                         : Edition 1, 11/2010
Document ID                     : uuid:f4bba29c-8d72-41f1-ba45-fcf2244fd51b
Instance ID                     : uuid:7b488f0f-1f21-4cda-99c5-906bd3559108
Keywords                        : Edition 1, 11/2010
Page Count                      : 282
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Author                          : HP LaserJet Information Engineering

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Hp Laserjet Pro Cm1415Fn Color Multifunction Printer Reference Guide CM1410 MFP Series Software Technical ENWW

HP Laserjet Pro CM1410 c02577815

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation